Home

Tektronix CSA8000B Stereo System User Manual

1. 10x attenuator BNC cable attached to TRIGGER GATE TTL on the rear panel Figure 1 16 Hookup for the gated trigger tests 4 Set up the instrument a Push the Trigger MENU front panel button to display the Trig Setup dialog box b Click Internal Clock under Trigger Source in the Trig Setup dialog box The Internal Clock rate should be set to 200kHz c Verify that the Gated Trigger option in Enhanced Triggering section is selected check box is checked See To Use Gated Trigger step 4 on page 3 51 d Turn the Vertical SCALE knob to set the vertical scale to 50 mV div The channel scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule 5 Set the time base Set the Horizontal SCALE to 2 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule 6 Set the display for Normal and Show Vectors enable See To Set Display Styles on page 3 68 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 33 Incoming Inspection 7 Push the Horizontal MENU button the Mode in All Timebases must be set to Lock to Int 10 MHz 8 Verify that Triggering occurs Verify signal is triggered with waveform on screen See Figure 1 17 on page 1 34 Triggered signal indicator File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Terons lal B R fe e S gt i c Am Cc S gt i c Am Acq Mode Sample Trig Internal Clock
2. Low reference RR are l 4000p sd ivj Figure B 8 RZ eye aperture parameters NRZ Sources The automatic measurement system uses the following levels when measuring NRZ source waveforms For the NRZ measurements and their definitions that use the levels described here see page B 37 B 62 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods NRZ Measurement The following levels are used when deriving measurements on NRZ waveforms Reference Levels TerossH Low reference Bite ERIR ae TerossL 132 51 tee Tis BAe eae FN REN re feds 5 p Figure B 9 NRZ measurement reference levels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 63 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods NRZ Crossings The following measurement parameters are used when deriving NRZ measure ments Figure B 10 NRZ crossings B 64 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods NRZ Eye Aperture The following parameters are used when deriving measurements on NRZ Parameters waveforms aperture Figure B 11 NRZ eye aperture parameters CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 65 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods NRZ Overshoot Levels The following measurement parameters are used when deriving overshoot measurements on NRZ waveforms
3. 3 104 Source Dependencies In general math waveforms that include sources as operands are affected by updates to those sources m Shifts in amplitude or DC level of input sources that cause the source to clip also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the vertical offset setting for a channel source that clip its data also clip the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the acquisition mode globally affects all input channel sources thereby modifying any math waveforms using them For example with the acquisition mode set to Envelope a C1 C2 math waveform will receive enveloped channel 1 and channel 2 data and therefore will also be an envelope waveform m Clearing the data in a waveform source causes a baseline zero volt level to be delivered to any math waveform that includes that source until the source receives new data Time Base Dependencies Selections for math waveform sources operands consist of channel and reference waveforms that are acquired or defined and viewed in the main time base The math waveforms derive their time base and record lengths from waveform sources You cannot change them directly you can only change them indirectly by changing the time base for the source In case of sources having different record lengths the math waveform created matches the shorter waveform and the additional trailing data from the longer waveform is not used You
4. i q POSITION gt LEVEL press to select among displayed waveforms press again to turn a selected waveform off O O Button lights indicate displayed and selected waveforms Page 3 62 RESOLUTION READY Press to display and select a time base view not oes RRE selected or to select among displayed views press selected timebase again to toggle it off Ce ti except Main which is always on Page 3 64 q SCALE p e Turn knobs to vertically scale position and lt lt gt offset selected waveform Page 3 8 Pele Turn knobs to Horizontally scale position and set record length of selected waveform Page 3 10 Use controls to set trigger level and lights to monitor trigger state Page 3 48 2 8 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual SE A eee Display Map Single Graticule View Drag cursors to measure waveforms on screen Drag the Horizontal Reference to move the point around which horizontal scaling expands and contracts the waveforms Drag the Waveform Icon vertically n to position waveform Right click on a waveform or its gt Show icon for handy access to often used setup controls and properties Drag ground reference icon to add offset to a waveform Drag across the waveform area to zoom the boxed waveform segment to full screen width Ic fico omve ee 9 7384 aH ql A CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual CSPI SS CUTS N STS a st Te S aja
5. Max Min NRZ Mid 7 Where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The minimum vertical value of the selected waveform the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize t
6. See page 3 62 for information on displaying waveforms Setup Utilities Help Tr Database Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors TDR JwimDB 1 IV Onf Display Source Main C1 4 Clear Data ajz AO alc Run St CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases As you can see in the illustrations below the normal vector view of a waveform displays the waveform data in dot mode the waveform display is updated with each acquisition to reflect the current data In Fig 3 30 waveform database display has been turned on and you can see the waveform data accumulation is displayed all at once with subsequent acquisition data being added to the display as it is acquired Brame Oo kes Pea Aaa etter die repel Figure 3 29 Normal vector view of a waveform p orng 500 Orm y Figure 3 30 Waveform database view of a waveform CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 163 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Customize the To change the display options of waveform database data on the graticule use Database Display the procedure that follows Overview To customize the database display Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have a waveform assigned to one of the waveform databases See To Set Up a Waveform Databa
7. m Mode Slope C Auto Noma EAC Level Joow az Set to 50 Holdoff 5 00045 Enhanced Triggering I Metastability Reject E ney Triggering Check to gt et enable Complete set up 5 Attach an appropriate TTL gating signal to the TRIGGER GATE TTL rear panel connector Operation is as follows TRIGGER GATE TTL m Triggering system will be disabled when the gating signal is a TTL low and instrument will not acquire The triggering system will be enabled when the gating signal is a TTL high and the instrument will acquire There is an internal pull up on the Gated Trigger input such that if no drive signal is supplied or if the input is left unconnected triggering will be enabled even if the Gated Trigger is selected in the Trig Setup dialog box For more 6 Press the Help button in the Trig Setup dialog box to information access the online assistance specific to triggering commands You can also read about key trigger features in Keys to Using on page 3 40 See page 3 167 for information on online help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 51 Triggering 3 52 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ey Displaying Waveforms To make use of the waveforms you acquire you will often want to display them This instrument includes a flexible customizable display that you can control to examine and analyze acquired waveforms This section pres
8. End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Related control elements amp resources m Display Options MV Histogram Color Ez Sie Linear C Logarithmic m Limit Controls Top fi 0 Omi aH Left Right 16 33ns re 16 66ns EE Bottom 160 Orni i Absolute Cz 3 157 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 158 Histogram Statistics After you check Enable Histogram in the Histogram Setup dialog box histogram statistics appear on the right hand side of the screen The following table is a list of the available histogram statistics and a brief description of each Table 3 10 Histogram statistics Name Mean Median Standard Deviation Peak to Peak Pk Pk Mean 1 StdDev u 10 Mean 2 StdDev u 20 Mean 3 StdDev u 30 Peak Hits of Histogram Hits of Waveforms Description The average of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than and half are greater than this value The standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box The peak to peak value of the histogram Vertical histograms display the amplitude of the highest nonzero bin minus the amplitude of the lowest nonzero bin Horizontal histograms display the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the leftmost nonze
9. When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The logical 1 of the NRZ signal The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled a histogram is built from the upper half of the NRZ eye and the mean of the histogram yields the High level The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manu
10. m One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 m One 50 Q BNC cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1341 00 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 17 Incoming Inspection m One SMA 10X attenuator such as Tektronix part number 015 1003 00 m One or more quantity to match number of electrical channels to compen sate 50 Q terminators such as Tektronix part number 015 1022 01 m One 50 Q terminator cap such as Tektronix part number 011 0049 02 m One 80E00 series electrical sampling modules installed as outlined in its User manual m One 80C00 series optical sampling module installed as outlined in its User manual optional test only if purchased with for your instrument Mouse m Keyboard Perform the Diagnostics The instrument Diagnostics use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper adjustment Equipment required None Prerequisites First all sampling modules to be diagnosed must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Set up the instrument From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Diagnostics The Diagnostics dialog box displays See below 1 18 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection Diagnostics 2 x Subsystem Level Area Level Test Level Result Failures Run T Loop 0 T Halt on failure 0 L
11. m Select Meas1 m Set the Select Meas menu to Pulse gt Amplitude gt Mean Push the Vertical MENU front panel button to switch to the Vert Setup dialog box CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection c Set the Vertical Scale Vertical Offset and DC Calibration Output to the levels shown in the first row of the table that follows d In Measurement readout on screen verify that the Mean measurement for the channel under test falls within the limits given in the table e Repeat steps c and d for each row in the table Vertical Scale Vertical Offset DC CAL Output Limits mV div mV mV Minimum mV Maximum mV 1000 0 1000 0 1009 0 ee ee N ee o0 1000 0 1000 0 99 0 10 Test all channels Repeat steps 3 through 9 until all electrical input channels are verified 11 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the SMA cable from the channel input and the DC CALIBRATION output Verify Optical Input After verifying the electrical channels and if you have an 80C00 Series Sampling Channels Module installed you can now verify its optical channels This verification is done without an input signal Equipment None required Prerequisites At least one optical 80C00 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box 2 Set the Trigger S
12. Automatic Measurements Reference B 1 Automatic measurements reference All Sources B 56 calculation method B 56 Mid reference Level B 69 NRZ Measurement Reference Levels B 63 NRZ Sources B 62 Pulse measurement reference levels B 57 B 60 B 62 Pulse Sources B 57 RZ Measurement Reference Levels B 60 RZ Sources B 60 To Optimize the Vertical Resolution B 69 Tracking Methods B 68 Use a Waveform Database B 70 Automatic trigger mode Glossary 1 Autoset 3 5 Glossary 2 How to execute 3 109 how to execute 3 11 mask specific 3 142 overview 3 14 Average acquisition mode Glossary 2 Back up procedure 1 15 Bandwidth Glossary 2 Index 1 Index Bar Controls 2 7 Measurements 2 7 Menu 2 7 Readouts 2 7 Status 2 7 Tool 2 7 Waveform 2 7 BER Glossary 2 BER floor Glossary 2 Bit error Glossary 2 Brightness Contrast adjustment 1 15 Button SELECT Glossary 8 C CD instrument software 1 3 Certifications for instrument A 11 Channel Glossary 2 icon Glossary 2 number Glossary 3 waveforms Glossary 3 Channel icon Glossary 2 Channel probe deskew Glossary 2 Channels in sampling modules 3 27 maximum configuration 1 11 shared horizontal window 3 20 shared parameters illustrated 3 20 Cleaning instrument how to 3 175 Cleaning and inspection exterior 3 175 flat panel display 3 176 Cleaning optical connectors 3 176 Clipping 3 6 Clock internal Glossary 6 C
13. For more 9 information From the Chart Wizard make sure Built In is checked Then select the either Lines in the Standards Types tab or Smooth lines in the Custom Types tab See illustration at right Click Next to step through the next two steps accepting the defaults settings at each step Click the Finish button in step 4 You should have a waveform display similar to that show right Tip This procedure assumes MS Excel 97 You can likely specify titles customize the treatment and labeling of the x and y axes etc in your data analysis application either as you create the chart or afterward Use the help for your data analysis application to determine if it has these capabilities and for instructions in using them For more help on exporting waveforms press the Help button in the dialog box to access contextual online help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Chart Wizard Step of 4 Chart Type To use exported waveforms cont Control elements amp resources Standard Types Chart type hd Columns with amp Cones E Floating Bars iif Line Column Lit Line Column lex Logarithmic EE Outdoor Bars Pie Explosion Lik Column Area lit Lines on 2 Axes Custom Types Sample 250E 08 2 00E 08 150E 03 1 00E 08 5 00E 07 0 00E 00 5 00E 07 1 00E 08 1506 08 200E 08 250E 05 3 00E 08 Depth on 2 Axes el C User
14. Incoming Inspection Verify the Time Bases Work 1 28 7 Test all channels Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all optical input channels are verified After verifying the channels you can now verify that the time bases function This verification is done using a front panel signal Equipment required One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 One 10x SMA attenuator such as Tektronix 015 1003 00 One electrical 80E00 series sampling module Prerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the Internal Clock output through a 10x attenuator to the 80E00 sampling module input channel 3 as shown in Figure 1 11 CSA8000 TDS8000 SMA cable from INTERNAL CLOCK output to 80E00 C3 input 10x attenuator Figure 1 11 Hookup for the time base tests 3 Set up the instrument a Push the Trigger MENU front panel button to display the Trig Setup dialog box b Click Internal Clock under Trigger Source in the Trig Setup dialog box The Internal Clock rate should be set to 200kHz c Push the Trigger MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Trig Setup dialog box CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection d Channel gt lt buttons Push the
15. NOTE After first installing a sampling module s or after moving a sampling module from one compartment to another you should run compensation from the Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications You must run a compensation accessed from the Utilities menu whenever the extender configuration is changed from that present at the last compensation In short if you install or remove an 80E00 extender run a compensation If you exchange a extender for one of a different length run a compensation For instructions on running a compensation see Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 92 Figure 1 1 shows compartments for both large and small sampling modules along with the plug in connector for the ESD wrist strap that you must use while installing or removing these modules CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Installation TERNAL CLOCK DUTPUT Large module compartments 2 ii Connect ESD wrist strap here ane Small module compartments 4 Figure 1 1 Compartments for sampling modules Maximum Configuration You can install up to two large sampling modules and four small modules for a total of 10 inputs Of these 10 inputs only eight inputs can be active at one time see Figure 1 2 top two configurations Also note that installing a single large module in either compartment disables the first small module compartment see note This configuration see
16. Ox Compartments for small DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT If modules up to eight channels le O c EXTERNAL 10 MHZ REFERENCE INPUT TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER PRESCALE DIRECT PROBE input input POWER ANTISTATIC CONNECTION for wrist strap 1 MQ to ground CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 2 11 C an Rear Panel I O Map Removable hard disk drive to provide individual environment for each user or to secure data press to release lt a CDROM drive accessible from ____ gt Windows press to open Oo og 0g go USB connector for mouse or gt ooo keyboard and mouse a a a a PS 2 connectors for mouse and keyboard C0000 ooo 00 Upper VGA port to connect a second gt o 0 0 e 0 O 020202020 monitor for side by side display Lower VGA port to connect a monitor for oscilloscope display Parallel port Centronics to connect printer or other device GPIB port to connect to controller oo0oo0o0o0 RJ 45 connector to connect to network gt J COM1 serial port Card Bus slots for two PCMCIA type 1 cards two type 2 cards or one type 3 card O TRIGGER GATE TTL 1 PCMCIA card readers are not available on the following products CSA8000B SN B020338 and above TDS8000B SN B020346 and above Product software version 2 0 or gr
17. cece cee ce cee ceees 3 144 Figure 3 28 Vertical histogram view and statistics on data 3 154 Figure 3 29 Normal vector view of a waveform 0 3 163 Figure 3 30 Waveform database view of a waveform 3 163 Figure B 1 Reference level calculation methods B 56 Figure B 2 Pulse reference levels ce cececececeees B 57 Figure B 3 Pulse crossings and mid reference level B 58 Figure B 4 AOP pulse crossings and mid reference level B 59 Figure B 5 Overshoot levels cc cece ee ecececececeees B 59 Figure B 6 RZ measurement reference levels 2005 B 60 Figure B 7 RZ crossings 0 cece cece cece cece cere eees B 61 Figure B 8 RZ eye aperture parameters eeceeeeeee B 62 Figure B 9 NRZ measurement reference levels 60 B 63 Figure B 10 NRZ crossings 0 cece cece cere reece eees B 64 Figure B 11 NRZ eye aperture parameters 00e000 B 65 Figure B 12 NRZ overshoot levels cece ceceeceees B 66 Figure B 13 NRZ Crossings OMA c cee ce cere eeees B 67 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual vii Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information 1 13 Table 1 2 Line fuses ccc ccc cece cece e eee eens 1 13 Table 1 3 Standard accessories ccc cece cece cece eeeee 1 41 Table 1 4 Optional accessories
18. sdiiciiie tase See ine eee See nae 3 167 Whi Use aire sin aoo Riki wile ele eee Re eee aaah 3 167 Keys tosUsine aada iis eit A PR ee Ao Se Sena 3 167 How to Use Online Help rat irie Era EEIE cece eens 3 168 Cleaning the Instrument 0 cece cece ee ee ee ence eee 3 175 Exterior Cleaning dc 2 euataiet haan Wend dene eS beaut ees eats 3 175 Flat Panel Display Cleaning 0 0 cece cee eee ee eee 3 176 Optical Connector Cleaning 0 Err RARE OAP Ep ERS 3 176 Appendices Appendix A Specifications 0 ccc cece cece eee eeee A 1 P E eee ncn ze AR asa asc ss ge ote ae tego a ET tae ae A 11 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude 00 0 0 0c c ee eee eee B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing 0 c cee eee ccc eee ee B 8 Pulse Measurement Area 0 ee cece eee eens B 14 Return to Zero RZ Measurements Amplitude 0000 B 15 Return to Zero RZ Measurements Timing 00 0 cece B 29 Return to Zero RZ Measurements Area 0 6 eee B 36 Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Amplitude B 37 Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Timing B 50 Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Area 000 00 eee B 55 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods B 56 AN SOULCES 5 0 geoctsb te tate A ts ohare Maalinctng AR D
19. the high low values are displayed over about 6 vertical divisions also centered on screen RZ Eye Pattern to setup the default autoset for instrument to acquire the waveform data as follows m three rise fall edges are displayed over the center 6 horizontal divisions with the first rising edge placed near the 20 horizontal location second division amplitude the high low values is displayed over the center 5 vertical divisions Click OK to set Autoset to use the current criteria To execute push the Autoset button For more information on the controls described in this procedure push click the HELP button in any dialog box or select Help Contents and Index in the Help menu For More 5 Information End of Procedure To autoset cont Control elements and resources Autoset properties 2 x Select mode Edge C NRZEye ns Period C AZ Eve ak Cancel a CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms NOTE Autoset sets the vertical position to zero and adjusts the vertical offset to center the signal in the display If a standard mask is active for the selected waveform Autoset adjusts the selected waveform record to match the mask if possible Autoset adjusts the vertical scale and offset horizontal scale position and reference parameters as required for the mask standard To Reset the Instrument You may want to revert to the factory default setup if so
20. 3 62 To Display Waveforms in a Mag View 0 0 0 c cece eee 3 64 Customizing the Display 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 66 WHY USE rbd Shine spare E E E en drents garage E E E duce E 3 66 What S Special y ye tier ran aeaa dae skews aa toe Eea 3 66 Keys USNE e ha ea eaea ea ea Bayou e a cuore aA 3 66 To Sei Display SESS uer rin tarre Er RATEN RENNET E A AE EAS 3 68 To Customize the Graticule and Waveforms 005 3 69 Measuring Waveforms E ese be oe ETE Dist 3 73 Taking Automatic Measurements 00 00 c eee eee cece 3 74 Why USE uri e ta ean atin ana ivi wad Bawa eee ed ne 3 74 What s Measured aa oss cs ewe tee Sees eee A ease ee we 3 74 Whats Special 363 caa ed tenes bs dees ee Sane be Se a es oe 3 74 What s Exclided mensum soa nwa iawn hi eee ewe Cos eee hee 3 76 Keys to USING wn bce teas sek ee AS Me ee Say a ba Hee ee 3 76 To Take Automatic Measurements 00 0 0 e eee eee 3 80 To Localize a Measurement 0 0 cece cece eee eee 3 83 Taking Cursor Measurements 00 cee cee cee eee eee eee 3 85 Why USC cos ee sit ed ewe LAS SS ee ANEA Soe eed ee 3 85 What s Measured ssc tissai cia tae AAEN AA cea tae ee ee ne ee 3 85 What Sources Can I Measure 0 0 0 ee eee eee 3 86 Keys to Using Cursors 5 ce iis cae eae ees Soe ea ates oS 3 86 To Take a Cursor Measurement 0 0 0 c cece eee eee 3 89 To Set the Cursor Sources 1 0 0 ccc ccc ccc
21. Center zj 21 Background Screen Saver Appearance Effects Web Settings Display Properties Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors Display 1 Default Monitor on Chips and Tech 69000 PEI he Colors Screen ata High Color 16 bit 7 Less 1 More 256 Colors High Color 16 bit 640 by 480 pixels True Color 24 bit he Ertend my Windows desktop onto thts monitor Advanced weet _ CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output NOTE If you print the screen infrequently you may want to return the colors setting to 256 colors except when printing To return to 256 colors repeat the procedure above but select 256 colors in step 4 Remote Communication Remote communication is performed through the GPIB interface Consult the online Programmer Guide for help with establishing remote communication and control of the instrument To access the Programmer Guide select Programmer Guide in the Help menu from the front screen CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 139 Data Input and Output 3 140 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual E Se eee Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases The instrument comes equipped with statistical tools to help you display test and evaluate waveforms This section describes these tools and how you use them m Mask Testing Waveforms on page 3 141 describes how you c
22. Item m 80A02 EOS ESD Protection module Sampling Module Extender 1 meter Sampling Module Extender 2 meter m 3 5 Male to 3 5 Female SMA m Slip on SMA connector m 2X Attenuator SMA Male to Female m 5X Attenuator SMA Male to Female m 10X Attenuator SMA Male to Female m Power Divider m BNC Female 75 Q to 50 Q Type N Minimum Loss Attenuator m P6209 4 GHz Active FET Probe m P6150 9 GHz Passive Probe m Replacement hard disk drive m CSA8000 Series Communications Signal Analyzers TD amp 8000 Series Digital Sampling Oscilloscopes Service Manual Calibration Step Generator CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Part number 80A02 012 1568 00 012 1569 00 015 0552 00 015 0553 00 015 1001 00 015 1002 00 015 1003 00 015 1014 00 131 0112 00 P6209 P6150 119 6241 00 071 0438 xx 067 1338 00 Accessories and Options Options The following options can be ordered for the instrument m Option 1K Cart Option 1R Rack Mount Kit includes hardware and instructions for converting to rackmount configuration m Option GT Gated Trigger option m International Power Cords Options Option Al Universal Euro 220 V 50 Hz Option A2 UK 240 V 50 Hz Option A3 Australian 240 V 50 Hz Option A5 Switzerland 220 V 50 Hz Option AC China 220 V 50 Hz Option A99 No power cord shipped m Service offerings CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Option C3 Three years of calibration services Option C
23. Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Se ee eee Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference This reference describes the automatic measurement system of this instrument Automatic measurements support Pulse Return to Zero RZ and Non Return to Zero NRZ signals providing measurements in three categories Amplitude Timing and Area This reference gathers reference information for automatic measurements Specifically it lists A definition for each auto measurement type for example risetime period and suppression ratio organized according to the signal measured Pulse Return to Zero eye pattern or Non Return to Zero eye pattern m Pulse signals see Pulse Measurements on page B 2 m Return to Zero eye patterns see RZ Measurements on page B 15 m Non Return to Zero eye patterns see RZ Measurements on page B 37 Descriptions of the reference parameters levels and crossings that the automatic measurement system uses when taking automatic measurements See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 Descriptions of the methods for tracking the High and Low values that the automatic measurement system uses when in taking automatic measure ments See High Low Tracking Method on page 3 77 To learn about the controls that set up the automatic measurements see the Tracking Methods section on page B 66 or Measurement Se
24. Save Setup Save Setup As Save Waveform Recall Setup Recall Wav Export Waveform Print Ctrl P Page Setup 1 Current stp Erit CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview Name a destination Use the Look in drop down list and buttons see right to navigate to the directory which contains a waveform that you want to recall Select your waveform If not selected select wfm in the Files of type field to force the dialog box file listing to only include these types Use wfm for waveforms Tip Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at wim Choose your waveform file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the File name and Files of type boxes Read the comment associated with the waveform file you choose if a comment is present It can contain information that help you use the waveform you are about to restore see right View any included com ment optional Tip Selecting a file displays any comments that were entered when the waveform w
25. The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 29 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing cont Name RZ Cross RZ Cross Definition The time of a positive crossing defined as the mean of the histogram of the data sampled at the mid reference level Cross Tcross Where Tcross is the mean of the histogram of a positive crossing See RZ Crossings on page B 61 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first rising edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a wav
26. Virtual Keyboard Choose from alphabetic or QWERTY styles 1 Except for Shortcut the Menu Names refer to the menus found in the Menu bar at the top of the instrument screen The shortcut menu for a waveform can be displayed by right clicking on a displayed waveform or on its icon which is displayed in the waveform bar left of the graticule 2 Available only on instrument running the MS Windows 98 Operating System 3 66 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Normal and Persistence Displays Use display persistence to control how wavetorm data ages m Normal style displays waveforms without persistence each new waveform record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel You can choose to display normal waveforms as vectors which displays lines between the record points or dots vectors off which displays the record points only You can also choose an interpolation mode See Interpolation below m Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform record points on screen and displays them for a specific time interval The oldest waveform data continuously fades from the display as new waveform records acquire m Infinite Persistence style accumulates the data record points until you change some control such as scale factor or explicitly clear the data causing the display to be erased Waveform data builds up as new data records acquire Persistence style applies to all waveforms except for
27. according to your preferences What s Special Color grading You can select color grading of a waveform so that its data color or intensity reflects the frequency of occurrence of the data Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the the display system so that it presents waveforms and other display elements Display Settings Table 3 5 lists display attributes that you can set and where they are accessed Table 3 5 Customizable display attributes Display attribute Access Options Menu name Entry Utility User Preferences Graticule Style Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles Utility Choose from Normal Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence Display Mode 7 Show Vectors Utility Choose No to display each waveform as a series of dots normal display mode only Display Choose Yes to display vectors or lines between the dots Shortcut Properties Waveform Label Enter a new label for the waveform you have selected Utilities Waveform Prop s Utility Waveform Prop s Waveform Color Cursor Colors Choose from six different colors for each waveform choose from 16 Graticule Colors Display different colors for a cursor graticule histogram or mask Mask Color Mask Test Waveform Color Shortcut Color Grading Choose to display a waveform with its data color graded based on its Grading frequency of occurrence See Color grade a waveform on page 3 70
28. curacy short term optimized mode Characteristics DC 200 kHz maximum dictated by trigger rate and actual holdoff setting If trigger rate is less than the maximum or the requested holdoff exceeds the minimum the trigger rate and or holdoff will dictate the sampling rate 20 50 100 250 500 1 000 2 000 or 4 000 samples 1 ps div to 5 ms div in 1 2 5 steps or 1 ps increments Maximum record lengths apply at certain ranges per table below Maximum record length 1000 2000 4000 50 ms maximum 10 fs minimum 1 ps minimum Two modes Short Term Optimized and Locked to 10 MHz Reference The 10 MHz reference may be internal or external Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80E04 sampling module is included in specification Range lt 20 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval 21 ps div 8 ps 0 1 of interval Time Interval Accuracy CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 2 System Timebase cont Description Time internal ac curacy locked to in ternal 10 MHz refer ence mode Horizontal deskew range and resolution Characteristics Strobe placement accuracy for a given horizontal interval and position on same strobe line per table below Contribution from 80E04 sampling module is included in specification lt 20 ps div 1 ps 1 of interval 21 ps div 8 ps
29. 10 C and 40 C The instrument must have been operating continuously for 20 minutes within the operating temperature range specified m The instrument must be in an environment with temperature altitude humidity and vibration with the operating limits described in these specifications NOTE Sampling Interface refers to both the electrical sampling module compartments and the optical module compartments unless otherwise specified Table A 1 System Signal acquisition Description Characteristics Number of input 8 acquisition channels maximum channels Number of small sam 4 compartments for a total of 8 channels pling modules compartments Number of large sam 2 compartments for a total of 2 channels pling modules compartments CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual A 1 Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 System Signal acquisition cont Description Small Sampling Mod ule Interface Large Sampling Mod ule Interface Characteristics Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this interface Tekprobe Sampling Level 3 Hot switching is not permitted on this interface 1 Total actively acquired channels lt 8 Table A 2 System Timebase Description Sampling rate Record length Horizontal scale range Horizontal position range Horizontal resolution Horizontal position setting resolution Horizontal modes 1 Time internal ac
30. Acquiring Waveforms 3 32 for the frame or until acquisition stops due to a specific test condition such as the failure of a mask test The resulting horizontally skewed FrameScan acquisitions display successive individual bits acquired in increasing time order FrameScan acquisitions can continue through an entire frame of data if needed to help you to uncover faulty bit sequences leading up to pattern dependent failures l Subframe 1 Subframe 3 lt Subframe 5 l Subframe 2 gt lt Subframe 4 gt peace Subframe 1 Subframe 2 Subframe 3 Subframe 4 Subframe 5 Accumulated Notes acquisitions Ahis the horizontal position change one bit period 1 bit rate Subframe acquisition duration is 40 greater than the bit period Figure 3 10 How FrameScan acquisition works scanning on a 127 bit PRBS shown CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Acquirein Use the procedure that follows to set up the instrument to acquire in FrameScan FrameScan Mode mode Overview To acquire in FrameScan mode Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have an appropriate sampling module in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up The signal to be scanned must be input to a channel See sampling module user manuals for and an appro
31. For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The top reference level for a measured waveform Several methods can be applied to the data sampled in the upper half of the waveform to determine the High value You can use the Tracking Method control to select among them See Tracking Methods on page B 66 Also see High Low Tracking Method on page 3 77 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The bottom reference level for a measured waveform Several methods can be applied to the data sampled in the lower half of the waveform to determine the Low value and you can use the Tracking Method control to select among them If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The largest amplitude peak of the waveform over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For
32. Measurements on systems Set source to External Direct or External Prescaler as with a synchronized pretrigger appropriate see Trigger Source Connectors and connect the signal pretrigger signal Any application requiring that Set source to External Direct or External Prescaler as the input signal provide the appropriate see Trigger Source Connectors Use a signal trigger splitter or power divider to couple to both the Ext Direct or Prescaler input and the input channel so that the sampled signal is also the trigger signal Any application requiring that Set source to External Direct and use a Tektronix probe as you probe the trigger source described in Probe to Trigger Source Connection on page 3 44 Any application requiring that Set source to External Direct and use a TTL connection to you perform special measure trigger gate as described in To Use Gated Trigger on ments using gated trigger page 3 50 Trigger Source and ESD Observe static precautions when coupling trigger sources to this instrument inputs to this instrument its sampling modules and accessory probes You must take proper precautions please read your sampling module user manual for more information N CAUTION Electrostatic static damage can permanently degrade and damage the CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 43 Triggering 3 44 Trigger Source Connectors External triggers can be connected to either the Trigger DIRECT or Trig
33. Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 41 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name B 42 NRZ Gain NRZ High Definition The amplitude gain between two waveforms The measurement returns the ratio between the amplitudes measured within the Eye Aperture of each of the waveforms _ Ampl2 NRZ Gain Ampli Where Ampl1 and Ampl2 are the amplitudes of the two source waveforms See NRZ Amplitude on page B 37 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83
34. Product Description Firmware Upgrade product software becomes necessary See Software Installation on page 1 15 New versions of the software may become available at our web site See Contacting Tektronix on page xiii in Preface Tektronix may offer firmware upgrade kits for the instrument Contact your Tektronix service representative for more information see Contacting Tektronix on page xiii Sampling Modules Supported 1 4 This product can use the following optical and electrical sampling modules listed below These modules which plug into the instrument are more fully described in their respective user manuals These manuals were shipped with those sampling modules that were ordered with this product The sampling modules listed here were available at the time this manual was published see your Tektronix product catalog for current offerings Optical Sampling Modules m 80C01 622 2488 9953 Mb s 12 5 20 GHz optical module Clock Recovery 622 2488 Mb s added with option CR m 80C02 9 953 Gb s 20 30 GHz optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 Gb s added with option CR m 80C03 1 063 1 250 2 488 2 500 Gb s amplified optical module Clock Recovery for all rates added with option CR This module has been superseded by the 80C07B m 80C04 9 953 10 3125 Gb s 20 30 GHz optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 Gb s added with option CR1 Clock Recovery 9 953 Gb s and 10 66 Gb s added with option CR2 This
35. See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The true root mean square of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ RMS Noise RZ Signal to Noise Ratio Definition One standard deviation of the data distribution sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High logical 1 or Low logical 0 levels RMS noise Higho or RMS noise Lowo The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width The High or Low selection for Noise At control
36. Setup dialog box 3 164 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To customize the database display cont Related control elements amp resources Set display options 4 Choose from the following display options Display Options Color Choose color to draw the waveform database in fe ieee m o colors that vary with how frequently each sample value intereiy occurs in the database Invert Choose this option to reverse the color or Bima ree JE mphasized 8 si intensity assignments to each grading partition Inverting p Emphasize Counts the colors may make it easier to view the variations of fos BE SEN color or intensities and makes it easier to see 100 frequencies or occurrences with smaller numbers of counts Intensity Choose Intensity to draw the waveform database with varying intensities that vary with how frequently each sample value occurs in the database Grading Method Select any one of four grading Additional information about Grading Method is methods available from the pull down menu located on page 3 161 Emphasize Counts If you select one of the two Emphasized grading methods slide the Emphasize Counts percentage control to specify the range of counts you want emphasized Note The Display Options controls apply globally to all four databases that this instrument provides Examples 5 See the following illus
37. TcrossL is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the low reference level See RZ Measurement Reference Levels on page B 60 The adjustable low reference and high reference levels default to 20 and 80 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing cont Name Definition RZ RMS Jitter Jitter is the measure of time variance at the location where the signal crosses the mid reference level RMS Jitter is defined as one standard deviation o of that variance The mean of the histogram of the crossing data distribution is Tcross RMS Jitter Tcrosso The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude The jitter measurement can be performed on the positive or negative slope See Mid reference level on page B 69 The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the
38. The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 19 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ High RZ Low Definition The logical 1 level of the RZ signal The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled a histogram is built from the upper half of the RZ eye and the mean of the histogram yields the High level The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform datab
39. and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The difference between the Max and Min vertical values of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region RZ Peak to Peak Max Min Where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS80
40. channel reference and math waveforms and waveform databases 1 through 4 This instrument implements a robust automatic measurement system Some of the features adding value to this system follow Annotate Waveforms On Screen You can turn on annotations that mark character ization levels that each measurement uses to compute results See Figure 3 19 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Annotations indicate the waveform region determining measurement i re ier 5 3 Figure 3 19 Measurement annotations on a waveform Use Databases as Sources If you define the source you want to measure as a database in the Meas Setup dialog box you can use the database of that waveform as source The measurement you select operates on the accumulated waveform data databases accumulate repetitive instances of a source waveform over time For example consider the Max measurement Max will capture and update the maximum most positive value encountered For a database source the ongoing Max measurements can only result in a higher max value as the database accumulates ongoing acquisitions This process causes the Max measurement readout to track max up but not down In contrast the Max measurement for a waveform source not included in a database will track variation up and down as new waveforms are acquired Characterize Measurements Independently To allow you control over how your waveform data is c
41. display online help when performing the procedure To set acquisitions modes Control elements and resources Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls setup Triggering should also be set up Push the Acquisition MENU button to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click an option button to select the acquisition mode choose from the following modes Sample m Average Envelope For Average mode only enter the number of samples to to average in the Average box See the sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 48 for trigger setup ACQUISITION MENU Setups x Mask TOR Dip WimDB Hist Cursor Vert Hore Acq Tia Meas Acquisition Mode Sao f f Average eak C Envelope Fl m Stop After CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set acquisitions modes cont Control elements and resources Set the Stop 4 Under Stop After click one of the following options L M Stop After mode and action Run Stop Button Only Run Stop Button Only C Condition Condition E If you selected Condition choose a condition from the drop down list such as Number of Acquisitions or ASiga heverrs Mask Total Hits to stop on If the condition requires a ps Perce count c
42. etc Dragging The act of changing your selection either by clicking mouse or touching touchscreen a point on the screen and pulling across the screen while holding down the key mouse or maintaining contact with your finger touchscreen CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Error detection Checking for errors in data transmission A calculation is made on the data being sent and the results are sent along with it The receiving station then performs the same calculation and compares its results with those sent Each data signal conforms to specific rules of construction so that departures from this construction in the received signals can be detected Any data detected as being in error is either deleted from the data delivered to the destination with or without an indication that such deletion has taken place or delivered to the destination together with an indication that it is in error Error rate The ratio of the number of data units in error to the total number of data units Edge trigger Triggering occurs when the instrument detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope This instrument supports only edge triggering All trigger sources must be external except when using clock recovery available as an option with optical sampling modules or the internal clock Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument acq
43. meas7 meas8 To Define a Use the procedure that follows when defining a math waveform Remember you Math Waveform should first ensure that the sources you use exist Channel sources will be acquired when used in a math expression reference waveform sources should contain saved waveforms and so on These sources do not have to be displayed to be used Overview To define a math waveform Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 All channel and reference waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on See sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup in this Note If you use a channel that is not acquiring including it in a math waveform that you turn on will nee f l implicitly cause it to be acquired manue Display 2 Press the Vertical MATH button twice if it is unlit once if S the Math lighted to display the Define Math dialog box dialog box C5 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 105 Creating Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform cont Related control elements amp resources Select a math 3 Click the Math Waveform drop down list in the dialog waveform box and select a one of the eight available math waveforms M1 through M8 Be sure
44. package contents 1 7 product description 1 1 standard accessories list 1 41 Interpolation Glossary 6 description of modes 3 67 Introduction to this manual xi K Keyboard virtual Glossary 10 Keypad virtual Glossary 10 Knob Glossary 6 general purpose Glossary 4 Trigger MAIN LEVEL 3 40 L Level trigger 3 40 Linear interpolation 3 67 Glossary 6 Linearity measurement errors 3 6 Live waveforms Glossary 6 Low Glossary 6 LowRef measurement level Glossary 6 Mag and Mag2 Views 3 59 Manuals part numbers 1 41 related xii CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Index Map acquisition process 2 6 documentation 2 2 front panel 2 8 input output front panel 2 11 input output rear panel 2 12 system 2 4 user interface 2 7 waveform display 2 9 Mask testing 3 141 3 145 autoset to a mask 3 147 clearing statistics counts 3 151 count statistics 3 143 creating a user mask figure 3 144 definition of counts statistics 3 151 editing description 3 143 flexible features of 3 141 stopping acquisition based on 3 147 supported standards 3 142 to create a mask 3 152 to edit a mask 3 149 usage limitations 3 142 why use 3 141 Masks Fiberchannel standards supported 3 142 Gigabit Ethernet 3 142 SONET SDH standards supported 3 142 Math waveform defining overview 3 101 how to define 3 105 how to use 3 109 operations on 3 107 display considerations 3 108 source consider
45. such as risetime or extinction ratio You also can display statistics on how the measurement results vary as they continuously update See What s Excluded on page 3 76 for information on the indicator when measuring waveform parameters You get to choose m Most automatic measurements require both a source selection and a measurement selection To quickly select a measurement use the measure ment toolbar to first set the waveform type Pulse RZ or NRZ and then select a category Amplitude Timing or Area in the pulldown lists of the toolbar Next click the icon of the measurement that you want to use to measure the selected waveform or drag the icon to any waveform selected or not on screen to measure that waveform The results appear in the measurements readout at the right of the screen See the procedure that starts on page 3 80 m Select from the extensive range of parameters this instrument can measure for a list see Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported This section of the manual defines the supported measurements selections for each category m Feed the entire waveform to a measurement or limit the measurement to a segment of the waveform By default the instrument takes each automatic measurement over the entire waveform record but you can use measurement gates to localize each measurement to the section of a waveform see To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 Select from these measurement sources
46. use the following procedure to reset the instrument Overview To reset to factory defaults Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument is powered on and running See Power On Instrument on page 1 13 Execute 2 Push the Default Setup button End of Procedure Signal Conditioning This section contains background information that can help you more effectively Background set up the acquisition window of each channel Input This instrument samples sequentially in order to provide superior bandwidth and time resolution Sequential sampling systems sample the input without scaling it they have a fixed dynamic range therefore input protection and dynamic range are necessarily limited CAUTION Do not overdrive the inputs Also observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in the sampling module user manual Sampling modules are very sensitive to ESD CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 13 Acquiring Waveforms Autoset Considerations Autoset acquires samples from the input signal and attempts to take the following actions based on the input data m Evaluate the amplitude range of the input signals and offset of the vertical acquisition window to acquire the signal without clipping m Set the trigger level to the approximate midlevel of the trigger signal being applied either an external trigger or a clock recovery trigger m Evaluate the signal transitions and set the h
47. watts Average Optical Power watts DC Signal current DC amps Conversion Gain amps watts Where DC Signal Current is the O E converter photo detector current in DC amps Conversion Gain is the O E converter photo detector gain in amps watt Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To obtain accurate results the O E converter is calibrated at a fixed number of factory calibrated wavelengths to determine the conversion gain of the O E converter at each wavelength For best average optical power measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by Clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box Compensate the optical channel which corrects for minor DC variances in the average power monitor as part of the compensation routine To access choose Compensation in the Utilities menu of the application Cycle Mean The arithmetic mean of the waveform over the first cycle of the measurement region The waveform cycle is determined at the crossings of the mid reference level See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 Also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 The mid reference level is adjustabl
48. 3 6 Screen printouts change display 3 137 SELECT button Glossary 8 Selected cursor Glossary 1 Selected waveform Glossary 8 defined 3 7 Service support contact information xiii Setup recalling 3 113 saving 3 113 Setups how to recall 3 118 how to save 3 115 including comments with 3 114 purpose of saving recalling 3 113 virtual keyboard with 3 114 Shipping package contents of 1 7 Signal connection and scaling overview 3 4 Signal conditioning background 3 13 Sin x x interpolation 3 67 Glossary 6 Slope Glossary 9 trigger 3 40 Software description 1 16 diagnostic QAPlus Win 1 38 1 39 installation 1 15 release notes 1 16 System Rebuild CD 1 3 User Interface application 1 3 Windows 1 3 SONET SDH standards supported 3 142 Sources trigger 3 42 Specifications conditions for meeting A 1 cooling A 7 data storage A 9 display A 7 Index 8 environmental A 6 for instrument A 1 for sampling modules where to find A 1 mechanical A 10 ports A 8 power consumption A 7 signal acquisition A 1 time base A 2 trigger A 3 specifications A 1 Standard masks supported 3 142 Standard accessories 1 41 Statistics for histograms 3 158 Status bar 2 7 System diagnostics 1 16 System Rebuild CD 1 3 T TDS8000 description 1 1 Technical support contact information xiii Tektronix contacting xiii toll free number xiii Temperature compensation 3 92 3 100 Test equipment for incom
49. 66 Waveform bar 2 7 Index 9 Index Waveform databases behavior with automatic measurements 3 76 dimensions of 3 160 BIN7 3 161 BIN8 3 161 color 3 160 display 3 160 display options 3 160 EMPH7 3 161 EMPH8 3 161 emphasize counts 3 161 intensity 3 160 invert 3 160 persistence 3 161 special features 3 159 To customize display of 3 164 to set up 3 162 four database limit 3 159 usage limitations 3 159 vs vector view figure 3 163 why use 3 159 with intensity display figure 3 165 Waveform Display defining waveforms for 3 56 keys to using 3 56 Waveform record 3 28 definition applied to all channels 3 20 illustrated 3 29 Waveforms control operation vs selected 3 57 creating math 3 101 defining and displaying 3 56 Index 10 histograms on 3 154 including comments with 3 120 live Glossary 6 mask testing 3 141 math Glossary 6 why use 3 102 measuring 3 73 operations on all views 3 58 operations on selected 3 56 purpose of mask testing 3 141 purpose of saving recalling 3 120 purpose of taking histograms of 3 154 Reference Glossary 8 testing and statistical tools 3 141 virtual keyboard with 3 120 Web site address Tektronix xiii WfmDB Glossary 10 Window horizontal acquisition Glossary 5 vertical acquisition Glossary 9 Windows 1 3 Safe mode 1 16 Windows OS Glossary 10 Y YT format Glossary 10 Z Zoom fast access to 3 55 CS
50. A 8 Data storage Specifications Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive ca pacity CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Characteristics 3 5 in floppy disk 1 44 Mbyte compatable with DOS 3 3 or later format for storing reference waveforms image files and instrument setups 20 Gbytes A 9 Appendix A Specifications A 10 Table A 9 Mechanical Specifications Construction material Weight Overall Dimensions Overall mass pack aged product Overall Dimensions packaged product Characteristics Chassis Aluminum alloy Cosmetic covers PC ABS thermoplastic Front panel Aluminum alloy with PC thermoplastic overlay Module doors Nickel plated stainless steel Bottom cover Vinyl clad sheet metal Circuit boards Glass laminate Cabinet Aluminum 19 5 kg 43 0 Ib no keyboard no mouse no top pouch no power cord and no modules or front shield installed 22 0 kg 48 5 Ib keyboard mouse top pouch power cord front shield installed and no modules installed Height 343 mm 13 5 in Width 457 mm 18 0 in Depth 419 mm 16 5 in The dimensions do not include feet rack mount kit or protruding connectors 36 3 kg 80 Ib 1 oz Height 622 mm 24 5 in Width 711 mm 28 0 in Depth 787 mm 31 0 in CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix A Specifications Certifications Table A 10 Certifications and compliances Category EC Declaration of Conformity
51. Bits You need to know the bit in the bit stream at which you want to start the scan the appropriate horizontal scale the starting horizontal position and the total number of bits for the desired FrameScan cycle How FrameScan Mode Acquires FrameScan mode alters the normal acquisition sequence in order to scan a pseudo random bit sequence PRBS or another repetitive bit stream to acquire one bit at time in the same sequence found in the bit stream m Triggering is synchronous with the bit streams framing signal of the communication signal you want to scan which results in the acquisition of a single sample prior the scanning of the next bit You must supply an external trigger source that is synchronous with the frame possible sources are external frame trigger sync signals from a pattern generator or from a BERT Bit Error Rate Tester Acquisition operates in a scanning mode where a horizontal position is set to acquire the first bit which the acquisition system acquires as a subframe see Figure 3 10 on page 3 32 b horizontal position is incremented one bit period 1 bit rate and then the acquisition system acquires the second bit as a subframe The duration of each subframe acquisition is set to provide about a 20 overlap between frames c This sequence of incrementing and then acquiring the next bit continues until the instrument acquires the number of bits you specify CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 31
52. CSV without timing and scaling information the instrument does not import these waveforms directly If you intend to recall a waveform later save it see the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3 121 instead of exporting it You cannot import histograms m You may also choose to copy a waveform and paste directly into some applications such as Microsoft Word or Excel If so select your waveform and then select Copy in the Edit menu To Export Your Waveform The procedure to export waveforms is almost the same as the procedure to save a waveform Use the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3 121 while observing the following differences m Select Export Waveform from the the File menu instead of Save waveform The Export dialog box displays see Figure 3 25 that follows m You can only select and export one waveform at a time m You cannot include comments with your exported waveform m Your exported waveform will contain the waveform data as a series of comma separated values no timing information but data is sequential 3 128 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Export 21x m Export Waveform CH To file C Program Files References MainA1 txt E A Export me _ Figure 3 25 Export dialog box To Export Your Histogram Use the process just described for exporting a waveform on page 3 128 select the Histogram button in the Export dialog box see Figure 3 25 Als
53. Click this to trigger off the internal clock source and selectthe fE wfm Database Hist Cursor clock frequency from the pull down list at right Use an internal fe Glock trigger when working with TDR to synchronize the Mask TD R Disp generation of TOR step pulses 7 Vert Horz Acq Trig External Direct Trigger Source BE a Help X Click or touch here For in depth 5 Most dialog boxes whether setup or other types have a contextual Help button as shown right Click the button to open the overviews help system with an overview of the dialog box that s currently displayed See the following illustration Position 16 66ns Color CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 169 Accessing Online Help To use the online help cont Control elements amp resources Ovewiew __Firwion XG Setup Dialog Overview This dialog box gathers all controls for cursor setup such as cursor function and cursor 1 and cursor 2 settings See Cursor Function Settings for information onthe different cursor types What do you want to do next DdLearn more about cursor controls Hi Go to step by step procedure for setting Overview SCSA Haplos em ome ce Beto Cursor Setup dialog box Use this dialog box to set up the cursor properties and display Mask TDR Disp Wert Horz Acq Trig Wim Database Hist Cursor
54. Consult the user documentation of the module for a list of accessories Table 1 3 Standard accessories Item Certificate of Traceable Calibration for product at initial shipment m Business reply card m 1 Windows compatible keyboard 1 Windows compatible mouse 1 Instrument front cover m 1 Accessory pouch m 2 Touchscreen styluses 1 ESD wrist strap with 6 foot coiled cord m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Online Help part of application software m CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Reference m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Programmer Online Guide part of application software Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy manual and CD with connectivity examples CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Series Windows 2000 OS Restore Kit m CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Series Product Software Kit 8000 Series Demo Applications Software CD m Power cord CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Part number Not orderable Not orderable 119 6297 00 119 6298 00 200 4519 00 016 1441 00 119 6107 00 006 3415 04 Not orderable 071 1099 xx 071 1096 xx Not orderable 020 2449 xx 020 2526 xx 020 2527 xx 020 2480 xx Order by option number 1 41 Accessories and Options 1 42 Optional The following accessories are orderable for use with the instrument at the time this manual was originally published Consult a current Tektronix catalog for additions changes and details Table 1 4 Optional accessories
55. DC amps Conversion Gain is the O E converter photo detector gain in amps watts Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To obtain accurate results the O E converter is calibrated at a fixed number of factory calibrated wavelengths to determine the conversion gain of the O E converter at each wavelength For best average optical power measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box Compensate the optical channel which corrects for minor DC variances in the average power monitor as part of the compensation routine To access choose Compensation in the Utilities menu of the application CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ Crossing The height of eye crossing as a percentage of eye height measured in the Eye Aperture Eye Cross Low oan ae NRZ Crossing 100 x High Low Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels and EyeCross is the level at eye crossing See NRZ Eye Aperture Parameters on page B 65 The Eye Aperture is adju
56. Definition Delay The time interval between the crossings of the two mid reference levels on the two sources of the measurement Delay Tcross source1 Tcross source2 Where Tcross is the first positive or negative crossing time at mid reference level See Pulse Crossings and Mid reference Level on page B 58 The mid reference levels are adjustable and default to 50 of the pulse amplitude The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 of the two sources By default searching is forward from the Start Gate for each source but can be reversed so that searching is backward from the Stop Gate Direction can be controlled independently for the two waveform sources See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 Duty Cycle The ratio expressed as a percentage of the first positive pulse width within the measurement region to the period of the signal The time intervals are determined at mid reference level If Tcross1 is positive then Tcross2 Tcross1 Duly Cycle 100 tesco Toros If Tcross1 is negative then Tcross3 Tcross2 Duy Cine IN Tcross3 Tcrosst Tcross1 Tcross2 and Tcross3 are the times of the first three consecutive crossings at the mid reference level The mid reference lev
57. Direct Trigger input a period of 400 ps the Enable to Acquire delay is approximated as 3 x 5 us 0 0004 us 15 0012 us The Enable to Acquire delay is the amount of time after the Gated Trigger has been enabled the level goes from TTL LOW to HIGH when the first valid sample is retained by the system as the beginning of the waveform record length When the Gated Trigger is enabled and triggers begin to occur the system will reject the first three samples to avoid system recovery conditions Once the first three points have been discarded then the next valid trigger cycle will be the first point of the record section The system checks the status of the gated Trigger approximately once per holdoff and re arm cycle If the Gated Trigger is disabled immediately after this system check it will allow nominally a maximum time of holdoff trigger period to elapsed before the checking for the status of the Gated Trigger input recognizing the disable condition and halting any further sampling of the signal Square wave out from 50 2 back termination synchronized to the TDR internal clock drive signal Refer to Trigger System Internal Clock Typical performance into 50 2 termination 0 20 to 0 20 V low level 0 90 to 1 10 V high level DC voltage from low impedance drive programmable to 1 mV over 1 25 V range maximum Accuracy is 0 2 mV 0 1 into 50 Q Typical Accuracy is 0 2 mV 0 1 into 50 Q 5 V maximum Table
58. High Low S N Ratio Pgh or S N Ratio lone Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time The High or Low selection for Noise At control in the Measurement Setup dialog specifies that the measurement be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 49 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Timing Table B 8 topic describes each NRZ measurement in the timing category See Table B 7 on page B 37 for amplitude category measurements see Table B 9 on page B 55 for area category measurements Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing Name B 50 NRZ Bit Rate NRZ Bit Time NRZ Crossing Time Defini
59. High Level 3 Low Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the Low Level 4 Absolute Reference is set by absolute values in user units 5 AOP not shown measures the Average Optical Power of the waveform and uses it as the Mid Ref level See Pulse Crossings and Mid reference Level AOP on page B 58 for more information Figure B 1 Reference level calculation methods CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Pulse Sources The automatic measurement system uses the following levels when measuring Pulse source waveforms For the Pulse measurements and their definitions that use the levels described here see page B 2 Pulse Measurement Reference Levels Figure B 2 Pulse reference levels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 57 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Pulse Crossings and mimm Te Mid reference Level i Figure B 3 Pulse crossings and mid reference level Pulse Crossings and The following measurement parameters are normally used when measuring Mid reference Level AOP Optical Modulation Amplitude on a pulse Crossings at the measured Average Optical Power level determine the positions of the eye apertures for the logical 1 and logical 0 of the pulse size set in the measurement Region control The High Power Logic 1 and Low Power Logic 0 levels are determined as the mean values of the logical levels sampled within the ey
60. Le ee 3 114 To Save Your Setup ssri eke eG I ee a aed Oa Hee PE Mae le 3 115 To Recall Your Setup 0 cee ee cece eens 3 118 Saving and Recalling Waveforms 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 120 Why Use sac denen sitaa ere tins sane E wa aera ease ries ness ere 3 120 What s Special sd ssia shat tecskae share eera C ae boas or bee oe TASER 3 120 What s Excluded ors gasii eed Ue i ee ge cea 3 120 To Save Your Waveform ie rere rre viete nri trO cee cee ees 3 121 To Recall Your Waveform eicae cri teore prit tere cece eee eee 3 124 TOC lear References verreiker REEE ene dae wl eae wh Gee 3 127 Exporting Waveforms and Histograms 0 0 0 0 c cee eee eee 3 128 WIA E a EE EE ra a as head EEEE 3 128 Keys t Using c koie siciety be e AEE a A ee ie A 3 128 To Export Your Waveform 0 00 irit irit Keren ENESA 3 128 To Export Your Histogram 0 0 0 cece cece cee eee 3 129 To Use an Exported Waveform or Histogram 00005 3 129 Printing Waveforms 0 0 ec cee eee eee ens 3 132 Remote Communication sorit isit ori tiere cece cee eee eee 3 139 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 141 Mask Testing Waveforms eor urnen rens oant cee ee ence eens 3 141 WhyUSe esd s ti Ste Seated ashe sedate A A EE E 3 141 What s Special eis oS steeeacpet e ne ghee wate lagers EES 3 141 What s Excluded itv 2a lial dinde ha alec ls aeaa elt ale pig alates 3 142 Keysi USING yt cit
61. MLN Ara Can m once to display vertical bar cursors shown below m twice to display horizontal bar cursors athird time to display waveform based cursors Press the SELECT button to toggle selection between the two cursors The active cursor is the solid cursor Turn the General Purpose knob to position each cursor on the waveform to measure the feature that interests you File Edit View Setup Utilties HelplTiggered Wwavefoms 0 Tkon ll SALASA mie RMR arene erao A E e Pulse fAmpitude mm nnn eae an m anra E oe 2 al imb81 Man c1 t 15 94ns t2 20 55ns t 1 808ns Wat 621 9MH2 Read the results in the cursor readout In the figure shown above waveform cursors are used to measure the bit time of the eye diagram Tip The cursor readout indicates the source time base and waveform for the selected cursor in this case the main time base M1 and channel 1 C1 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 89 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take cursor measurements cont Related control elements and resources To reassign cur 6 Press the Cursor button repeatedly to toggle through the sors cursor selections until the cursors are off Then select a new waveform on screen Tip You can set the cursors source s directly using the See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 3 90 procedure listed at right End of Procedure To Set the Cursor Sources You can target each
62. Prescale Limiting Preamplifi er Module User Manual 80A02 EOS ESD Protection Module Instructions CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Service Manual Description An online help system integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this product A quick reference to major features of the instrument and how they operate Part of the online help system this guide comprises an alphabetical listing of the programming commands and other information related to controlling the instrument over the GPIB This is an online document The user manual for the electrical sampling modules Included as a PDF file on the product software CD or the PDF file can be downloaded from the Tektronix website The user manual for the optical sampling modules Included as a PDF file on the product software CD or the PDF file can be downloaded from the Tektronix website The user manual for the 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module Included as a standard accessory if you ordered this module with this instrument Shipped in the module package not the main instrument package The instructions for the 80A02 EOS ESD Protection Module Included as a standard accessory if you ordered this module with this instrument Shipped in the module package not the main instrument package Describes how to service the instrument to the module level This optional manual must be ordered separately For more information on how the product documentation re
63. Recovery 9 953 and 10 709 Gb s added with option CR1 This module has been superseded by the 80C11 m 80C10 65 GHz optical module for 40 Gb s RZ and NRZ telecom m 80C11 9 953 10 31 10 52 10 66 10 71 11 10 Gb s Multi rate amplified optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 Gb s added with option CR1 Clock Recovery 9 953 and 10 66 Gb s added with option CR2 Clock Recovery 9 953 and 10 71 Gb s added with option CR3 Continuous rate clock recovery added with CR4 Electrical Sampling Modules m 80E01 A single channel 50 GHz sampling module m 80E02 A dual channel 12 5 GHz 50 Q sampling module with low noise m 80E03 A dual channel 20 GHz sampling module This model provides the same features as 80E04 but without the TDR step generators CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 5 Product Description 1 6 80E04 A dual channel 20 GHz TDR sampling module The TDR step generator provides 35 ps reflected step risetime Voltage polarity can be reversed on either step to provide true differential TDR 80E06 A single channel 70 GHz sampling module This model provides very high performance bandwidth for general purpose characterization of high speed devices and circuits Other Modules 80A01 Trigger Prescale Limiting Preamplifier Module A single channel module providing 8 14 GHz AC coupled 50 Q limiting preamplification It increases the sensitivity of the prescale trigger input of the 8000 Series instruments
64. SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal divisions per waveform period counter clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 1 us div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the time base set to 1 us div m The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated NOTE The signal will not move past the minimum position setting File Edit View Setup Utilities HellTiggered MWaveforms 9511 O O Thomy E a x B 2 nilc Fun Stop Aca Mode Sample x Trigf intemal Clock z F ov ae Bile l Puise F Amplitude x nun no cn mm an nr sv 7 na e ru pu sy lt A f Tela Ss Si iain T erence Waveform C3 20 00m Vidiv i I I I I Internal clock signal C3 93 40rm 1 000psidiv Control bar Ja 20 00mv aH pov as an i o00psvai as 18 00ns 4 5 05PM 4 7 00 Vertical scale Horizontal setting scale setting Figure 1 13 Main time base verification 1 30 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection 6 Set up the Magl time base a Push the Horizontal View MAGI button on the front panel The Mag1 time base view will display under the Main time base view b Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule and is now reading out the scale of the Mag1 time base view 7 Verify that
65. See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The difference between the average power levels of the logic 1 High and the logic 0 Low of the optical pulse signal The levels are the Mean values of the logical levels sampled within an Aperture of the logical 1 and 0 regions of the pulse The logical 1 and 0 time intervals are marked by the crossings of a reference level determined by the Average Optical Power AOP of the signal Pulse OMA watts P1 PO Where m P1 and PO are the average power levels of the logical 1 and 0 determined within the respective apertures m The adjustable Aperture defaults to 20 center respectively of the logical 1 and logical 0 time intervals If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best measurement results Perform a vertical compensation See Perform the Compensation on page 20 Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 5 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude cont Name Overshoot Overshoot Definition The ratio of the maximum peak to the signal amplitude over the measurement region expressed as a percentage Overshoot 100 x igh Len Where m Max is the signal maximum m High a
66. Some optical sampling modules support continuous rate clock recovery If you have such a module installed a user defined custom clock recovery rate is selectable from the Trigger Source Setup menu Internal clock output Trigger Trigger Trigger prescale direct probe input input power Figure 3 13 Trigger inputs 3 42 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Use a trigger source that is synchronized with the signal you are sampling and displaying Selection of your trigger source depends on your application as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Application based triggering Application Source to use Communications optical Set source to Clock Recovery set the clock recovery type and serial NRZ data signals use an optical sampling module equipped with a clock recovery option supporting the specific data rate of the serial optical signal A custom clock recovery rate can be defined by the user if the optical module supports a continuous rate clock recovery Refer to Sampling Modules Supported on page 1 4 to see those modules that support continuous rate clock recovery TDR measurement using an Set source to Internal Clock to use the internal clock of the electrical sampling module instrument TDR clock and select the appropriate clock equipped with TDR frequency Disconnect any signal connected to the External 10MHz Reference Input when using the Internal clock
67. Timebase External trigger system system Math 1 8 inputs Page 3 39 Page Gated trigger _1_ gt 3 101 TTL input 3 53 option GT The model comprises five high level subsystems or processes embodying a variety of hardware and software functions Modular Sampling Specialization System Allows you to choose modules to begin tailoring your waveform acquisition based on the types of signals you want to acquire electrical or optical with clock recovery or without with bandwidth filter or not Provides cost effective solution for users needing very high bandwidth with superb time resolution on repetitive waveforms Sampling modules determine the size of the vertical acquisition window for each channel 2 4 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual System Overview Maps m Digital Signal Acquisition System Acquires a waveform record from each signal you apply to each channel using the following subsystems Acquisition System Sets vertical offset for the vertical acquisition window for each channel Performs the actual A D conversion and storing of digitized samples Also performs post A D sample based corrections to compensate for non linearities of various analog circuits m Trigger System Recognizes a specific event of interest on the input trigger signal and informs the Timebase of the trigger event s occurrence gating the taking
68. Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Taking Histograms Histogram Why Use What s Special 3 154 The instrument can display histograms constructed of waveform data You can display both vertical voltage and horizontal time histograms but only one at a time Histogram box Histogram readout use Sep ining Se SOYA te A Na Sf res Waveform WwW Main C1 f C1 56 00p widiy pi Histgrm hin C1 Mean 262 71 Median 264 34 Y Std Dev 13 65 Y Pk Pk 149 4 i 738 t20 955 30 996 Peak 2083384 Hits 35251143 Wyvirms 651918 Figure 3 28 Vertical histogram view and statistics on data Use histogram statistics to analyze a range of data that you select Some histogram features of note follow Flexible Histogram Editing You can use the controls in Hist Setup dialog box to completely specify the histogram box on the waveform in waveform units or as a percent of the graticule For quick edits you can use can use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to resize and reposition the box directly on the screen Any Waveform or database as Source Histograms can be taken on all channel math and reference waveforms You can also take a histogram on any of the waveform databases that this instrument provides Continuous Operation The histogram that you set up can run and its results can be displayed even if you turn off the display of the histogram or of the waveform CSA8000B am
69. Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Set Up a Waveform Database To set up a waveform database Related control elements amp resources Overview Prerequisites Open the Wim Database Setup dialog box Select the source and turn on the database 3 162 use the procedure that follows The instrument must have a waveform displayed to enable the waveform database controls Open the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting Wfm Database in the Setup menu Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform source for the waveform database By default the first available waveform is used as the waveform source unless you select a different source Check On to begin accumulating into the waveform database Check Display to turn on the display of the waveform database Uncheck this box to display the vector waveform selected as the source for the database Click the Clear Data button to clear the data accumulated in the selected database If the database is turned on the data is cleared and data accumulation starts over NOTE An alternative method of turning on a waveform database for the selected waveform is by clicking the waveform database button in the toolbar See right See Figures 3 29 and 3 30 on next page to see what both normal and waveform database waveform data look like on the graticule End of Procedure To assign a waveform to one of the four waveform databases of the instrument
70. Z aH Ll Pulse Timing an n an oc w 300 nn l E Internal gt clock signal ee 250 0 2 siv Control C3 50 00mY as pov BH Main Q Q f2 00000ns BH 19 000n aH 11 35 AM 2 22 02 bar Vertical scale Horizontal setting scale setting Figure 1 17 Signal triggered 9 Disable trigger Install 50 Q terminator cap to the end of the cable that is attached to the rear panel gated trigger BNC See Figure 1 16 on page 1 33 10 Verify that the Gated Trigger functions Verify signal is not triggered gate disabled Signal freezes on the screen above to indicate triggering has stopped See Figure 1 18 on page 1 35 Note the Not Trigd indication at the top of the window a Push the CLEAR DATA button b Verify signal is not triggered with no waveform on screen see Fig ure 1 19 on page 1 36 Note the Not Trigd indication at the top of the window 1 34 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection Untriggered signal indicator File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Not Trig d Tekron lal Ae Tig C Run Stop Acq Mode Sample z Trig intemal Clock Al aa he Puise Fr Amplitude m enna su i sro ene S ops P pe r 2SM Op say Control c3 poom apo mE main Q a 2 o0000ps 19 0007 BE 11 35AM 2 22 02 DE i Vertical scale setting Horizontal scale setting Figure 1 18 Signal not triggered signal frozen CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Ma
71. a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than that of the input signal or it appears unstable even though the TRIG D light is lit Aliasing occurs because the instrument sample interval is too long to construct an accurate waveform record See Figure 3 6 Actual high frequency waveform Apparent low frequency waveform due to aliasing Sampled points Figure 3 6 Aliasing Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing To quickly check for aliasing slowly adjust the horizontal scale to a faster time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting your waveform was probably aliased You can also try pressing the AUTOSET button to eliminate aliasing To avoid aliasing be sure to set resolution so that the instrument samples the input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component For example a signal with frequency components of 500 MHz would need to be sampled with a sample interval less than 1 nanosecond to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 23 Acquiring Waveforms To Set Acquisition Modes Overview Prerequisites To select an Acquisition mode Select the Acquisition mode Seta sample count 3 24 Use the procedure that follows to set the data acquisition mode and specify acquisition start and stop methods For more detailed information
72. accessories Two exceptions are the USB keyboard and mouse that ships with the instrument Both can be plugged or unplugged without first turning power off 2 Connect the keyboard and mouse observing the caution above Note that the instrument ships with a USB keyboard which plugs into the USB port see Figure 1 3 on page 1 12 for location and a USB mouse which plugs into the back of the USB keyboard NOTE Connection of the keyboard and mouse is optional You can operate most features without them using the front panel controls and the touchscreen 3 Connect the power cord 4 Ifyou have an external monitor connect the power cord and power on the monitor 5 Turn the Power switch on at the rear panel See Figure 1 4 on page 1 13 for switch location 6 Push the On Standby switch to power on the instrument see Figure 1 5 for the switch location 0 0g 000000009 00 Figure 1 5 On Standby switch location 7 Wait for the boot routine and low level self test to complete 8 Follow any instructions on the screen The internal setup software will automatically configure your instrument and install all required devices depending on the installed accessories CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Installation Powering Off the Instrument The instrument has a built in soft power down function that safely powers down the instrument when you push the On Stand
73. algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first specified edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 RZ Width The time interval between the crossings of the rising and falling edges at the mid reference level Width Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the rising and falling crossings The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 35 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Return to Zero RZ Measurements Area Table B 6 describes each RZ measurement in the area category See Table B 4 on page B 15 for amplitude category measurements see Table on B 5 on page B 29 for timing category measurements Table B 6 RZ Measurements Area Name RZ Area RZ C
74. almost all instrument settings with a few exceptions such as user options in the saved setup Retaining Current Settings Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the recalled setup If you do not want to lose your current setup save it to its own setup file for later recall before you recall the new setup CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Avoiding Setup and Waveform Mismatches Saved setups may contain settings inappropriate for waveforms currently in your instrument For example you might have saved a setup that displayed a fiber channel mask such as FC531 for testing channel 1 If later you display a gigabit ethernet signal in channel 1 and recall your saved setup the FC531 mask will display Avoiding Setup and Sampling Module Mismatches Recall of a setup assumes that the sampling module appropriate to the recalled setup is installed For example recalling a setup that saved optical vertical control settings requires that an optical sampling module be installed If not the instrument substitutes default settings for the affected vertical controls settings instead of recalled settings Other examples of such mismatches include m Recalling a setup that includes TDR without the TDR capable sampling module installed You must have the TDR capable module installed in the same compartment it was in when the setup was saved m Recalling a setup that includes a clock recovery setup without the app
75. as Main T Q 20 00nsiai Hep 3 172 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help cont Control elements amp resources To enable full 11 If you cannot find the information in the Contents or text search Index tabs of the online finder you may want to enable full text search From the application menu bar select Help and then select Contents amp Index See illustration at right Help Contents and Index Getting Started G uide Measurements Center Measurements Reference Programmer Guide From the online help finder see below choose the Find tab About TDS CSA8000 es Online Help Contents Index Find Find Setup Wizard Find enables you to search for specific words and phrases in help topics instead of searching for information by category Before you can use Find Windows must first create a list or database which contains every word from your help filefs To create this list now click N ext icy Maximize search capabilities Customize search capabilities ie Print Cancel 13 Choose the method for word list generation and select next or finish Once the word list generation finishes future accesses of the find tab will immediately access a pane for searching with full text search without requiring the word to be regenerated CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 173 Accessing Online Help Overvie
76. averages Average Optical Power AOP The time averaged measurement of the optical power over a much longer time period than the bit rate of the signal Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the instrument can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 707 attenuation of the original reference signal BER An acronym for Bit Error Ratio or Rate The principal measure of quality of a digital transmission system BER is defined as BER Number of Errors Total Number of Bits BER is usually expressed as a negative exponent For example a BER of 10 7 means that 1 bit out of 107 bits is in error BER floor A limiting of the bit error ratio in a digital system as a function of received power due to the presence of signal degradation mechanisms or noise Bit error An incorrect bit Also known as a coding violation Channel An input that connects a signal or attaches a network or transmission line to sampling modules for acquisition of channel waveforms by the instrument Channel Probe deskew A relative time delay that is settable for a channel Setting deskew lets you align signals to compensate for signals that may come in from cables of differing length Channel icon The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset CSA8000B amp TDS8000B Use
77. best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The arithmetic mean of the waveform over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude cont Name Mid Optical Modulation Amplitude Definition The computation of the middle point between the maximum and minimum amplitude peaks of the waveform over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The smallest amplitude value of the waveform over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement
78. between the logical 1 level High and the logical 0 level Low of the RZ signal Both High and Low levels are measured within the Eye Aperture RZ Amplitude High Low Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 15 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Average Optical Power dBm RZ Average Optical Power watts Definition The true average component of an optical signal expressed in decibels This measurement results from the use of a hardware average power monitor circuit rather than from the calculation of digitized waveform da
79. box If you do not set the methods individually the instrument uses its default character ization methods Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the default settings for High Low method and for reference level method To take automatic measurements Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 ue See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup Select the 2 Use the Vertical buttons to select the waveform to be rae waveform measured waveform The waveform may be a channel reference or math D CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements cont Related control elements and resources Take Automatic 3 Select one of the signal waveform types and then measurements select a category from the measurement bar File Edt iew Setup tities Help Triggered D Histogram waveforms l21x afs zam sl TLA TiafExema Diea E fov BE Box k2 e Jo ie ill C1 Lon fcliv 1C1 Rise 50 91ns Tronis lal x Click the measurement you want in the measure a zleo mE s0x n2 ment tool bar wa f fir ate i Waveform Read the results in the measurements readout f C1 200 0p Wdiv Tip To show the levels see page 3 74 on which ee ee coscoonvet_ your measurement is based turn on Annotations Right click on measurement in the readout and select Show An
80. box as shown below En Tektronix J Trigfe stermal Direct x 7 fpo ae External Direct a f Extemal Prescaler _ 54 Ali Internal Clock onan c3 100 0 3 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the DC CALIBRA TION output to the channel input that you want to test as shown in Figure 1 7 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection CSA8000 TDS8000 SMA cable from DC calibration output to 80E00 C3 input Figure 1 7 Hookup for electrical functional tests 4 Set the DC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT a Push the Vertical MENU front panel button This displays the Vert Setup dialog box NOTE When an optical module is installed the optical setup dialog box displays by default Click the Basic button to display the basic dialog box b Enter a level of 200 mV in the DC CAL box c Push the Vertical MENU front panel button again to dismiss the Vert Setup dialog box 5 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 1 8 VERTICAL C2 Se O Koria z Channel gt lt O buttons Figure 1 8 Channel button location CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 23 Incoming Inspection 1 24 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true The vertical scale readout
81. channel waveforms and reference waveforms displayed with color or intensity grading Interpolation For record lengths of less than 500 points you can choose to have the instrument interpolate between the sampled points it acquires Interpolation affects the display only mask testing histograms and automatic measurement results are based on acquired not interpolated data There are three options for interpolation m Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired The curve fit assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x interpolation is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves Sin x x interpolation may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times m Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit The straight line fit assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains m None turns interpolation off Only points actually sampled appear in the displays of waveform records CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 67 Displaying Waveforms To Set Display Styles Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display styles you can set Overview To set display styles Related control elements and resources Prer
82. compensated must be installed as outlined in their user manuals Second power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Run the compensation routines a From the application menu bar select Utilities and then select Com pensation In the Compensation dialog box the main instrument mainframe and sampling modules are listed The temperature change from the last compensation is also listed See Figure 1 6 Compensation BE Current Date Time 11 May 00 13 25 Select Action Mainframe Model Serial Date Time Status ATEMP Seve TDSICSAS000 6000000 11 May 001325 Pass 0 2 C Recall Compensate Click to select compensate Upper Sampling Modules CH Model Serial Date Time Status ATEMP 1 80C01 CR PQ2048 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C All o zm Choose all as targets 2 Lower Sampling Modules Serial Date Time overriden by upper modules overriden by upper modules 3 aOEO4 869 11 May 001325 Pass 0 0 C 4 BOEO4 B69 11 May 001325 Pass 0 0 C 5 80E03 B22 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C r Evecute Y 6 B0E03 B22 11 May 00 13 25 Pass 0 0 C I Click to start compensation 7 8 Help Close Figure 1 6 Compensation dialog box CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection b Wait until the Status for all items you wish to compensate changes from Warm Up to Pass Fail or Comp Req d c Under Select Action click the Compe
83. cursor to the source it is to measure See Cursors Treat Sources Independently on page 3 87 To do so use the procedure that follows Overview To set the cursor sources Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform If the source to be measured is in the Mag1 or Mag2 See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and time base turn that time base on page 3 48 for trigger setup Display the Cur 3 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities HE sor Setup dia select Cursors See right Vertical ode log box Horizontal Acquire a Trigger Akeasurement hhask Display Histogram tl Fre em 3 90 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To set the cursor sources cont Related control elements and resources Select the cur 4 From the pop up list see right for each of Cursor 1 and Click to access sources sor sources Cursor 2 select a source NEN r Select source from m To measure a single source choose the same pop up list Mantas source for both cursors Main C1 for example c2 vic3 To measure two different sources in the same time R base make sure the time bases match Main cB C1 and Main C2 for example ta Tn Math amp Ref sources a To measure two different sources in different time appear if defined E wo
84. data type Start import at row 1 E File Origin Windows ANSI Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below Tip This step assumes MS Excel 97 your tool may have similar import features for comma separated da PANE C treatconseutvedelmters as one ta Check its documentation Pe ee Troarn T Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 This screen lets you select each column and set lumn data Format the Data Format ARN General converts numeric values to numbers date C ext values to dates and all remaining values to text C pate MDY Do not import column Skip ata preview General General Gene WBi233499232 264830976 292880384 321323008 34327755 Cancel lt Back Next gt Begin your 5 Click on the row number to select the entire row chart containing your imported waveform values See illustration at right pie Edit a Insert Format Tools bata window Hel z DSO SRF S BRS O BS A N E l eB 0 elie Prong Ae rat vo B 7z u z2 Be Se ae Select the Chart button from the toolbar See illustration at right or from the Insert menu Select the entire row Access the chart wizard 3 130 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview Specify a 7 line graph chart Finish the 8 chart
85. defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default for each source the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first rising or falling edge as defined by Slope but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 RZ Duty Cycle The ratio of the RZ pulse width to the RZ bit time If the first crossing is positive then _ Tcross2 Tcross1 Teross3 Tcross1 Duty Cycle If the first crossing is negative then _ Tcross3 Tcross2 Tcross3 Tcross1 Duty Cycle Where Tcross1 Tcross2 and Tcross3 are the mean of the histogram of the first three consecutive crossings at the mid reference level The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Ga
86. defined Built in lect From Smooth lines subtype from Excel 95 Cancel lt Back Finish ae GB 100 2 B roret 10 ieee eH as b 90243072 2 50E 08 2 00E 08 10 1 50E 08 3 im 1 i 1 006408 tt 5 00107 17 33 49 e 81 97 113 j 161 177 193 209 25 241 f 17 0 00E 00 18 19 5 00E 07 20 21 1 00E 08 22 23 1 50E 08 25 2 00E 08 2 28 2 50E 08 29 30 3 00E 08 See page 3 167 to learn about accessing online help 3 131 Data Input and Output Printing Waveforms You can print the display screen including any waveforms displayed Before doing so you must install and set up your printer To Print Waveforms To print the display and its waveforms do the following steps Overview To print waveforms Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 Waveforms must be displayed on screen 2 Your printer must be accessible and configured properly m See Acquiring Waveforms on page 3 3 m See Triggering on page 3 39 m See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 See your printer instructions and or the Windows Help See page 3 161 for information on accessing Window help Access the 3 Select the File menu from the application menu bar ne Print dialog and then select Print in the menu Save Setup s box Save Waveform R
87. disk for recall later Some features of note follow Commenting The Save Waveform dialog box and the Recall Waveform dialog box contain a comments field for including and reading comments with your saved waveforms That way you can store information readable upon recall describing each waveform that you save Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name waveform files The Save and Recall Setup Waveform dialog boxes include the Virtual Keyboard button shown left When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the waveform path name file name and comment You cannot recall into a channel or a math waveform The instrument recalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations R1 R8 Also you cannot save and recall waveform databases CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output To Save Your Waveform Overview To save a waveform Prerequisites 1 Display the 3 Save Waveform dialog box Use the procedure that follows to save a waveform or waveforms to the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device The instrument must have appropriate sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your source must be a channel
88. elements amp resources Selecta 4 Navigate to the directory in which to store your SOHO Je EIEN destination waveform You can Reference Prenu File s m Save to a reference Click to check Reference and Fie Path w then use the pulldown list to select any reference R1 R8 You can save to empty references or save over existing references Skip to step 8 to finish Save to a file Click to check File s and continue with step 5 that follows Select your 5 Select one or more waveform to save Select waveforms individually waveform s to pa Click a waveform in the tree view see right Note that only displayed timebases and their waveforms appear Select waveforr s Extend your selection if desired by holding down the control key and clicking additional waveforms Or Select all waveforms in tinebase Select all waveforms in a given timebase by clicking the timebase for example click Main Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard you can t use the control key to extend selections However you can touch or click individual waveforms or timebases to select them Select directory 6 Specify the directory and filename s in which to save Edit path and file name and name file your waveform s If you ve selected a single waveform Save selected wavefern to you can Reference P7 empty z File s m Use the default name and directory appearing in EA My Doc
89. enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The time of the first positive crossing of the data sampled at the mid reference level in the measurement region Cross Tcross Where Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first positive crossing See Pulse Sources on page B 57 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default searching is forward from the Start Gate for the first rising edge but can be reversed so that searching is backward from the Stop Gate The time of the first negative crossing of the data sampled at the mid reference level in the measurement region Cross Tcross Where Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first negative crossing The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default searching is forward from the Start Gate for the first falling edge but can be reversed so that searching is backward from the Stop Gate CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing cont Name
90. event to the last sample in the waveform record and is calculated as EORT Horiz Position 1 0 01 x Horiz Ref x Time Div x 10 divisions Channel Deskew 3 46 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering For example EORT 6 us 1 0 1 5 x 1 us div x 10 div 0 6us 5 u 11 us when Horizontal position 6 us Horizontal Ref 50 Time Division 1 us div Channel Deskew 0 set to minimum In this example because 11 us is greater than 5 us the current control settings determine the minimum usable holdoff the instrument can use Trigger point EORT Time to EORT gt Horizontal position Horizontal delay 19 ns min Time Time of first point Horizontal Time of last point zero reference point EORT Figure 3 15 Trigger to End Of Record Time EORT Requested vs Actual Holdoff The instrument operates with two holdoff values m Requested the last value requested in the Trigger Setup dialog box You can set times from 5 us 50 ms but the time requested becomes the actual time used only if it meets the requirements just described for Actual Otherwise the holdoff time value requested is held for later use as described for Actual m Actual in effect the holdoff time that is the time the instrument is using or will use when acquiring data The instrument uses it when the minimum usable holdoff determined as described in Usable Holdoff on page 3 46 is greater than the
91. example RISE time the instrument automatically enables the method controls for your adjustment The methods available are shown below Mean of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the mean or Mean Tracking Method average value derived using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on Shes oP whether it is defining the high or low reference level This setting is best for examining eye patterns and optical signals Histogram Min max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses Min Max Tracking Method High Max Mid ref Low Min B 68 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Mode Tracking Method Histogram high Histogram low Mean Tracking Method Min Max Tracking Method Bd Mid reference Level Mode of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Mode is the best setting for examining pulses Auto switches between methods Auto method first atte
92. fill the screen horizontally Cej C Ce S SCALE q SCALE p Deskew the 7 Set up the channel to be deskewed repeat step 5 for Channel channel the channel to be deskewed ow Push Vertical MENU front panel button and from the Vertical Setup dialog box adjust the Deskew value see Deskew p 000ps abe right to make the edges of the reference and the EEI deskew channel coincide or are as close as possible If you cannot align the edges completely try selecting Han Auto l the reference channel and adjusting its deskew Deskew If you need to you can deskew additional channels e e more channels c3 On Dere Turn off the channel just deskewed and leave the reference channel on SS 4 i Set up the channel to be deskewed repeat step 7 and step 8 for the new channel to be deskewed Continue this process for as many channels as you want to deskew Disconnect the deskew hookup End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 97 Measuring Waveforms To Perform Dark Level Performing a dark level compensation maximizes the accuracy of the extinction and User Wavelength Gain ratio and other optical automatic measurements you take Performing a User Compensations Wavelength Gain compensation optimizes an optical channel for your custom Overview Prerequisites Select the waveform Access dark level com pensation 3 98 input signal NOTE Dark level compensa
93. from the mean for the High and Low levels RZ Eye height High 3 ohigh Low 3 clow Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels and ohigh and olow are the standard deviations The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition RZ Eye Opening Factor RZ Eye Opening Factor is a measure of how noise affects the vertical opening between High and Low levels of an RZ pulse The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High and Low levels are determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper and lower half of the pulse respectively The no
94. in the Measurement Setup dialog instructs the measurement to be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The ratio of the RZ pulse amplitude to the noise on either the High logical 1 or Low logical 0 level The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled and the mean of the histogram yields the High and Low levels The noise is defined as one standard deviation of the distribution within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture _ _ High Low _ _ High Low S N Ratio Hoho or S N Ratio lowo Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is ad
95. instructions on screen Repeat steps 2 and 4 for any additional optical channels you want to compensate If you want you can can compensate an optical channel for wavelength gain a custom input signal In Vert Setup dialog box click the User Wavelength Gain button under Compensation See right Follow the instructions on screen In the User Wavelength Gain Compensation dialog box set the wavelength and power of the signal to be applied to the channel See right m User should have an optical signal attached to module input with a precisely known amount of optical power An independently calibrated average optical power meter is used to measure this power precisely Then signal is connected to the 80C0X with the same fiber cables Press the OK button to execute the compensation Repeat steps 2 6 and 7 for any additional optical channels you want to compensate End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Control elements and resources r Compensate Dark Level User Wavelength Gain Compensate Dark Level User wavelength Gain User Wavelength Gain Compensation Eq User Wavelength l E nm Power w Cancel 3 99 Measuring Waveforms 3 100 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a SS Creating Math Waveforms Once you have acquired waveforms or taken measurements on waveforms the instrument can mathematically combine them to create a wavefor
96. is only available with Option GT installed Overview To use gated trigger Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Access the 3 Setup trigger dialog box 3 50 The Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropri ately for the signal to be acquired Trigger on your input signal Use the procedure To Trigger on page 3 48 as needed See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module N installation See page 3 24 of this manual for acquisition Note that you must supply the input signal and the TTL pag 7 setup gating signal to the appropriate instrument inputs The instrument does not control or generate these signals From the application menu bar select Setup and then eral select Trigger See right You also can select this menu Horeortal by pushing the Trigger MENU button Sena Measurement N Mask Display Histogram Cursors wim Database TDA CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Overview To use gated trigger Cont Control elements and resources Enable gated 4 In the Enhanced Triggering options section of the dialog Setups HE triggering box check Gated Trigger Mask TDR Dis Wim Database Hist Cursor Meas Vert Horz Acq Trig m Trigger Source External Direct External Prescaler Intemal Clock 200 He r Clock Recovery l z C1 None z Deme 2 None Define
97. it becomes necessary to reinstall the Windows operating system use the CDs and instructions provided with your Windows Operating System Rebuild kit shipped with your instrument This process will return the hard disk to the its original condition present when the instrument shipped NOTE All data and programs you may have installed will be lost when reinstal ling the Windows Operating System In case of instrument problems you may wish to run the system diagnostics If so see the procedure Perform the Diagnostics on page 1 18 If the instrument is turned off before the operating system boots or if you ve installed a third party product with a driver incompatible with instrument start up Windows will open in Safe mode The touchscreen will be inoperable therefore you must install the standard accessory mouse and keyboard to operate the instrument When you have finished investigating and removed any barrier to Windows start up you can reboot If the instrument no longer boots to Safe mode you can remove the keyboard and mouse if desired CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual EEE a Incoming Inspection Assemble Equipment This section contains instructions for performing an incoming inspection of this instrument Performance of an incoming inspection is not required to put the instrument in service These instructions verify that the instrument is operating correctly after shipment but do not check product specifi
98. m TcrossH is the time of crossing of the high reference level The low reference and high reference levels are adjustable and default to 10 and 90 of the pulse amplitude There are four Reference Level Calculation methods available for determining these reference levels See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help and in Also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first falling edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The inverse of the Period of the signal 1 Pee Tcross3 Teross1 Where Tcross3 and Tcross1 are the times of the first two consecutive crossings on the same slope at the mid reference level See Pulse Crossings and Mid reference Level on page B 58 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing cont Name Definition Period The time interval between two consecutive crossings on the s
99. m See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 See your printer instructions and or the Windows Help See page 3 161 for information on accessing Window help Access the 3 Select the File menu from the application menu bar Save Setup Print dialog and then select Page Setup in the menu Save Setup As box Save Waveform Recall Setup Recall Waveform Export Waveform Print Ctrl P 1 Setupl stp 2Curentstp SCAMy Documents Setup2 stp Ent 3 134 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To print using ink saver mode cont Control elements amp resources Set Ink saver 4 In the Page Setup dialog box that displays click mode Ink saver Mode Page Setup Click OK to set the instrument to use Ink saver mode or Click Print to set up your print job and print the display End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 135 Data Input and Output To Print to a File You can also print the instrument screen and its waveforms to a file This instrument currently supports printing to BMP JPEG TIFF PNG and Targa image file formats NOTE Screen images saved using the PNG Portable Network Graphics format can consistently achieve compression ratios better than 10 1 and often better than 50 1 compared to a BMP screen image file PNG is a lossless format similar to GIF format Overview To print to a file Control elements amp resourc
100. mask test a waveform Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have at least one waveform turned on See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 for information on displaying waveforms Access the Mask 2 Select Mask from the Setup menu to display the Mask Setup Utilities Help Setup dialog box Setup dialog box Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Display Histanrann CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 145 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To mask test a waveform cont Related control elements amp resources Select the mask 3 Select the waveform to be mask tested from the drop down Soure a source and ae list under Source Weis T Enable Mask Courts Use the Comm Standard drop down list to select a Comm Standard None standard or user defined mask See Table 3 9 on age 3 142 for a list of available standard masks a F Use Wwlm Database Clear Data Selecting a communication standard or user defined mask automatically m displays the mask on screen and autosets for the mask if Automatic is checked in the dialog box automatically enables mask testing uncheck Enable Mask Counts if you want to turn off mask counting displays mask count statistics in the mask readout right of the display A mask does not have to be displayed to have mask counting enabled Check Use Wfm Database to use a waveform database as t
101. may also want to read the section about deskewing channels on page 3 96 Expression Syntax You build math waveforms using the Define Math Waveform dialog box To help you create valid math waveforms this dialog box blocks illegal entries by disabling any dialog box element that would create an invalid entry in the math waveform expression The syntax that follows describes valid math expressions which can be quite complex in excess of 100 characters long lt Expression gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Expression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Scalar gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Scalar gt CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Creating Math Waveforms lt Term gt lt Waveform gt lt Expression gt lt Scalar gt lt Integer gt lt Float gt lt Meas Result gt lt Waveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt lt ReferenceWaveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 lt Reference Waveform gt R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 lt UnaryOperator gt Integrate Differentiate Average Max Min Filter Vmag Exp log 1n sqrt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Meas Result gt meas1 meas2 meas3 meas4 meas5 meas6
102. mean of the histogram of the crossing of the high reference level and TcrossL is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the low reference level The adjustable High and Low reference levels default to 10 and 90 of the NRZ eye amplitude See NRZ Measurement Reference Levels on page B 63 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 Jitter is the measure of time variance on the rising and falling edges at the NRZ eye crossing or at the mid reference level RMS Jitter is defined as one standard deviation o of that variance The mean of the histogram of the crossing data distribution is Tcross RMS Jitter Tcrosso The Jitter At control in the Measurement Setup dialog specifies if the jitter is to be measured at the eye cross or at the mid reference level The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the eye amplitude See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on i
103. not necessarily be able to pass through overloaded signals to the sampler Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits just described Note that there are no hardware bandwidth filters in most sampling modules or in the instrument Some optical sampling modules have bandwidth filters settable from the Vertical Setup menu of the instrument See the user manual for your optical sampling module for more information Scaling Offset and Positioning Considerations These key controls determine the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system m Set the vertical offset to display the features of interest on your waveform and avoid clipping See Note that follows Adjust the display control Vertical Scale to control the portion of the vertical window displayed on screen adjust the display control Vertical Position to position the waveform on screen Note that vertical offset affects the vertical acquisition window but vertical scale and position do not These last two controls are display controls only Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 describes the vertical acquisition window CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Clipped m Set horizontal scale position and resolution record length so that the acquired waveform record includes the signal attributes of interest with good sampling density on the wav
104. of the crossing of the low reference level TcrossH is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the high reference level See RZ Measurement Reference Levels on page B 60 The adjustable low reference and high reference levels default to 20 and 80 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing cont Name Definition RZ Phase _ Tcross1 of source2 Tcross1 of source Phase 360 Tcross3 of source Tcross1 of source Where Tcross1 of source1 is mean of the histogram at the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 1 See RZ Crossings on page B 61 m Tcross3 of source is the mean of the histogram at time of the next crossing on source 1of the same polarity as Tcross1 cross of source2 is the mean of the histogram at the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 2 after Tcross1 of source All Tcrossings are at the mid reference levels which are adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 If enabled meas
105. on that curve None displays only the acquired data points Knob A rotary control Live Waveforms Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system acquires data Channel waveforms are live waveforms reference waveforms are not Math waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms in their expressions C1 R1 defines a live math waveform R1 R2 does not Low The value used as the 0 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details LowRef The waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calculations Typically set to 10 See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details Math Waveform A waveform defined by a combination of one or more operands channel waveforms reference waveforms and automatic measurement scalars Math waveforms may also contain math operators and functions CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary Measurement See Automatic Measurement Measurement statistics The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts showing the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples Measurement updating The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect changes in the waveform targeted by an automatic measurement MidRef The waveform middle reference level used in such measurement
106. operating system do not include the QAPlus Win software These procedures verify the instrument hardware functions A diagnostics program called QAPlus Win is used to make the verifications No equipment is required QA Win32 is a comprehensive software application used to check and verify the operation of the PC hardware in the main instrument This procedure uses QA Win32 to verify the instrument hardware To run QA Win32 you must have either a working keyboard or a working mouse or other pointing device and have Windows 98 running CAUTION Before running the QA Win32 tests be aware of the following problems and work arounds m The QA Win32 discrete memory test fails if the system being tested contains more than 16 megabytes of RAM Since your product ships with more than 16 megabytes of RAM please follow the procedure for Checking the Hardware and Operating System on page 1 39 NOTE Do not run the memory test from the Memory icon m The QA Win32 hard drive test may report an incorrect number of tracks and cylinders for your hard drive This is an internal mapping problem but has no effect on the results of the test Bad sectors on your hard drive are still found and marked m The QA Win32 keyboard test does not respond correctly to keys used by Windows 98 Keyboards made for use with Windows contain two or three keys specific to that operating system These are usually located on either side of the space ba
107. panel Supports the following modes Standard mode output only Bi directional PS 2 compatible Bi directional Enhanced Parallel Port IEEE 1284 standard Mode 1 or Mode 2 v1 7 Bi directional high speed Extended Capabilities Port ECP 9 pin D subminature serial port connector using NS16C550 compatible UARTs supporting transfer speeds up to 115 2 kbits sec PS 2 compatible keyboard and mouse connectors RJ 45 LAN connector supporting 10 base T and 100 base T External audio jacks for MIC IN and LINE OUT One USB connector the second USB is disabled because of internal use Complies with IEEE 488 2 A TTL logic 1 enables triggers to be accepted A TTL logic 0 disables all triggering A pull up resistor is present to hold the input high enable triggers when no control signal is present 5V maximum CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 7 Ports cont Specifications Gated Trigger Input Enable to Acquire Delay Option GT equipped instruments only Gated Trigger Input Maximum Disable Time Option GT equipped instruments only Internal clock trigger out YX DC calibration output DC calibration output typical External 10 MHz reference input Characteristics 3 trigger cycles where each cycle is defined as holdoff time trigger latency For example With holdoff set to its minimum 5 us setting and a 2 500 GHz clock signal applied to the External
108. push Acquisition MENU to display m Run Stop Button Only sets the instrument to start and stop the acquisition only when you use the Run Stop button which is available on the front panel on the application toolbar and in the Acquisition Setup dialog box If toggled to Run acquisition will start if a valid trigger occurs If toggled to Stop acquisition stops immediately m Condition in addition to Run Stop Button which can always stop acquisition the stop after control provides additional conditions you can select from to stop an acquisition See step 4 Set the Stop Mode and Action on page 3 25 or access the online help in the Acquisition Setup dialog box for more information CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Global Controls Like the horizontal controls the acquisition controls apply to all active channels For example channel 1 cannot acquire in Sample mode while channel 2 acquires in Envelope mode you cannot stop channel 8 from acquiring if turned on while other channels continue to acquire Unlike horizontal controls acquisition settings extend across time bases you cannot set a different sample mode for channels acquired in the Mag time base the sample mode you set extends across the Main Mag1 and Mag2 time bases Preventing Aliasing Under certain conditions a waveform may be aliased on screen Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for preventing it When
109. requested value The instrument retains and changes to the requested value if the user changes control settings such that the requested value exceeds the minimum usable holdoff Actual values can range from 5 us 55 ms CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 47 Triggering To Trigger Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger acquisitions Overview To trigger Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 24 of this manual for acquisition setup signal probing connecting techniques for your application TRIGGER INPUT Apply a trigger 2 Connect the signal to be triggered on using proper PRESCALE Typical approaches include using 2 5V P P MAX m External Trigger Direct or Prescale Portion of the input signal coupled to the appropriate input see right using a power divider on input signal TRIGGER DIRECT INPUT Internal Clock No external trigger required ERIA IA Clock Recovery Recovered clock signal obtained from those optical sampling modules supporting clock recovery connection internal through the sampling module no external trigger connection required A custom clock recover
110. resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The true average component of an optical signal expressed in decibels This measurement results from the use of a hardware average power monitor circuit rather than from the calculation of digitized waveform data Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To determine Average Optical Power dBm this measurement simply converts average optical power watts to decibels using a log10 function referenced to 1 mW To see how average optical power in watts is determined see the Average Optical Power Watts measurement on the following page For best measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box Compensate the optical channel found in the Utilities gt Compensation dialog box A portion of this overall optical channel compensation will correct for minor DC variances in the average power monitor CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition Average Optical Power
111. specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector 50 Q input resistance DC coupled only 1 5 V DC peak AC maximum input voltage 1 Vpp Adjustable between 1 0 V 100 mV DC 3 GHz 50 mV typical DC 4 GHz 1mV 50 mV 0 10 x level 1 2 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better 800 fs RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical 2 5 ps RMS 0 04 ppm of horizontal position or better 1 6 ps RMS 0 01 ppm of horizontal position typical 167 ps typical CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 System Trigger cont Description Characteristics External direct trigger Metastability Reject on Zero typical metastability External direct trigger Tekprobe SMA Levels 1 and 2 Hot switching is permitted on this real real time accessory time accessory interface interface External prescaled Prescaled triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel trigger capabilities connector with Holdoff Auto Normal Metastability Reject On Off External prescaled trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger source is applied to respective connectors Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference specifications only apply under the condition that there is no external 10 MHz reference applied to the front panel connector External prescaled 50 Q AC
112. specified by the Emphasize Counts setting see Emphasize Counts below BINS selects a binary grading method that uses eight display colors intensi ties This method assigns ranges of counts to colors intensities by succes sively halving the maximum bin count and assigning the resultant ranges in brightest to darkest color intensity order If the maximum bin count is less than the number of display colors then a one for one mapping of counts to colors intensities is used BIN7 selects a binary grading method that uses eight display colors intensi ties This method assigns ranges of counts to colors intensities by succes sively halving the maximum bin count and assigning the resultant ranges in brightest to darkest color intensity order If the maximum bin count is less than the number of display colors then a one for one mapping of counts to colors intensities is used Emphasize Counts controls specify what range of counts you want empha sized when EMPH7 or EMPH8 Grading is selected The slide bar selects a percentage value the entry box allows direct entry or the percentage value where the lowest value 0 emphasizes bins with low counts and the highest value 100 emphasizes bins with high counts NOTE Changes made to the display options affect all waveform databases Persistence You set the persistence controls independently for each waveform database the instrument supports CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 161
113. the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ Peak to Peak Noise The maximum range of the amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High or Low levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 PkPk noise Highpp or PkPk noise Lowpp The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time The High or Low selection for Noise At control in the Measurement Setup dialog instructs the measurement to be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 m Perform Autoset or otherwise optimize the vertical resolution before this measurement i e increase the overall vertical size of the waveform but without producing off screen
114. the Control bar at the bottom of the display Virtual keypad A pop up pad that lets you enter specific numeric values for the control from which it is popped up Waveform The visible representation of an input signal or combination of signals Waveforms can be channel reference or math waveforms Waveform cursors The cursor mode that presents two cursors you position to measure both the time and amplitude parameters of a waveform record The instrument displays the time of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time between the cursors The instrument also displays the value of both cursors with respect to the waveform ground and between the cursors Waveform database A collection of sequentially acquired waveforms Waveform types Waveform types of the source to be measured can be Pulse NRZ and RZ Each waveform type has a measurement category Amplitude Timing or Area that can be selected WfmDB See Waveform database Windows OS The underlying operating system on which this instrument runs YT format The conventional display format It shows the amplitude of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis Glossary 10 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Index A Accessories list 1 41 optional 1 42 standard 1 41 Accuracy Glossary 1 Acquiring Waveforms 3 3 Acquisition Glossary 1 cycle 3 29 horizontal delay 3 28 horizontal delay time with Glossary 5 h
115. the Magl time base operates Confirm the following statements m The brackets on the Main View waveform top graticule are a full screen width apart 10 divisions See Figure 1 14 on page the 1 31 m One period of the internal clock signal a square wave in the Mag view bottom graticule is about five horizontal divisions on screen Matches the waveform in the top graticule See Figure 1 14 m Rotating the Horizontal SCALE knob clockwise to 500 ns div expands the waveform in the bottom graticule to double the period about 10 horizontal divisions per waveform period and returning the Horizontal SCALE knob to 1 ps div returns the period to about five divisions Leave the Horizontal Scale set to 1 us div Left mag time base Right mag time base marker marker File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Wavetorms 0 Tektronix X rale Run Stap Acq Mode S ample x Trig intemal Clock 7 NIF ov aH ER Fulse zj NE Waveform C3 20 00m vidiv A Main time base view lt Mag time base view lt 2D N 100 0rm 00 0rn 4 HODuSdiv cs a 20 00mv as pov BH FaR Q fi coo sea BE irns BE 1257 PM 3 22 00 Figure 1 14 Mag time base verification CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 31 Incoming Inspection 8 Verify that the Mag2 time base operates a Push the Mag1 button to remove the display of the Mag time base b Perform steps 6 and 7 but use the Mag2 button instead o
116. the mask b Defines all points above the imaginary line as the top of the mask all points below as the bottom of the mask c Inserts new user added points above the imaginary line into the top of the mask inserts new user added points below the imaginary line into the bottom m To create a mask with a concave area create several masks to cover the same area Data falling into two overlapping masks is counted only once as part of the total mask hits CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 143 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 144 These points form Top bottom dividing line the top of the mask not displayed Left most point These points form the bottom of the mask Figure 3 26 Creating a user mask Note in Figure 3 27 that a new vertex has been added to the mask shown in Figure 3 26 Since the point is added above the line it s added to the top User added vertex a Figure 3 27 Adding a new vertex CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases m Masks are saved with setups so you can save sets of masks by defining them and then storing the instrument setup Displayed masks are overwrit ten when you recall a stored setup select a standard mask or initialize the instrument To Mask Testa Waveform Use the procedure that follow to set up the instrument to mask test a waveform against a mask standard or user defined mask set Overview To
117. the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Wear Eye Protection Wear eye protection if exposure to high intensity rays or laser radiation exists Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ix General Safety Summary Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Symbols and Terms Terms in this Manual These terms may ap
118. the procedure that follows to recall a setup to the instrument Remember that recalling a setup replaces the existing setup which is lost Overview To recall your setup Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument should have appropriate sampling modules in place for the setup to be recalled You must have access to a setup saved by the instrument See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation See Power On Instrument on page 1 13 m See Keys to Using on page 3 114 Display the 2 From the application menu bar select File and then File Edt View Setup Utities Hel Recall Setup select Recall Setup See right Eat ae dialog box Save Waveform The Recall Setup dialog box allows navigation to directories lists setup files in the directory and provides for selection of a setup file Comments for selected files Recall Waveforms Export Waveform 5 Print Ctrl P appear in the comment box See below e i Recent Fie Recall Setup 29 x Exit take eee aae cl t a Current stp a ProtoE val02 stp E EyeHistogram stp E ProtoE val03 stp FrameScan1 stp a FrameScan2 stp GbyteE ther stp a ProtoEval01 stp File name GbyteE ther stp Files of type Setup Files stp x Cancel Comment Does mask test on StarComm proto Help genie 1 elect sampling module in See Test Spec _GByteMask __Defaut_ Name a 3 Use the Look in drop
119. to the math waveform defined by the expression Here are Mah Wareiam eigen some guidelines l PE p Functions Sources Num Avgs Set the number of averages applied by init Dit maat Fiten el a 4 the Avg function Only affect waveforms if the Avg Est tet Sat tnt 65 cej c7 AAA function is used TAA A Num Avgs F Filter Risetime Filter Mode Centered Filter Risetime Set to limit risetime to improve TDR m5 measurement results Backspace Clear Meas2 Meas3 Meas4 Meas Meas Meas Filter Mode Choose Centered or Shifted for causal or noncausal filtering 3 106 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform cont Related control elements amp resources Apply the 6 Once you have defined the math expression to your expression satisfaction click the Apply button Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog box See To Use Math Waveforms on page 3 109 for more procedures _ For more 7 Click the I2 icon in the the upper right corner of the information Define Math dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control Click the Help button in the Define Math dialog box to access context sensitive overview on math waveforms overview of the online help system See Accessing Online Help on page 3 167 for End of Procedure Operatio
120. wig or inte ET A P t aa eet BAX bf ko dA y Figure B 12 NRZ overshoot levels B 66 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods NRZ Crossings OMA The following measurement parameters are used when approximating Optical Modulation Amplitude OMA on NRZ waveforms As shown OMA on NRZ waveforms is determined from the means of histograms of the data from level 1 and level 0 taken on a vertical slice through the NRZ eye crossing This method gives an approximation of Optical Modulation Amplitude of an NRZ waveform Optical Modulations Amplitude measurements are primarily defined for Pulse signals l lt Vertical slice at logic high P1 histogram at logic low 115 psd Figure B 13 NRZ Crossings OMA CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 67 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Tracking Methods This topic describes measurements methods tracking the High and Low values used in taking automatic measurements The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as the High Top or Low Bottom for a waveform influence the fidelity of amplitude and aberration measurements For many of the automatic measurements supported the instrument automatically determines these levels and disables all or some of the High Low tracking method controls for example for RMS If the measurement you select has High Low methods that are appropriate to adjust or
121. you want to display measure or otherwise process To ensure the best possible data for further processing you do the following m Set vertical scale to adjust the waveform size on screen You can set vertical offset to shift the vertical acquisition window up or down on the signal to capture the portion you want CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Set horizontal scale to control the time duration of the horizontal acquisition window to capture as much as you want of the input signal s To control where in the input signal data stream that the horizontal acquisition window acquires you set horizontal position to delay the window relative to a trigger to capture the waveform portion you want To increase or decrease the resolution between sample points change the record length For more background on the acquisition window concepts see Signal Condition ing Background on page 3 13 What s Special A Versatile Autoset Autoset can be defined to set up for a waveform edge period or an eye bit pattern Pushing the Autoset button automatically sets up the instrument controls for a usable display based on the property you choose and the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup You can also reset the instrument to its factory default settings by pushing the Default Setup button What s Excluded The vertical offset cannot be adjusted for a
122. 0 0 Loop count Subsystem Acquisition 8 Area Vertical Test A D Convert DAC Load Tektronix Close Help 2 Select a diagnostics suite a In the dialog box click the Subsystem Level tab b Select the all the entries by clicking the first entry Control Proc and dragging down to select the rest All entries should be highlighted as shown above c Inthe Run box leave Loop and Halt on Failure unchecked 3 Verify that the diagnostic suite passes a Click the Run button to execute the diagnostics b The diagnostics may take several minutes to complete Verify that Pass appears as Status in the dialog box when the diagnostics complete c If instead an error number appears as Status rerun the diagnostics If Fail status continues after rerunning diagnostics and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service 4 Close the diagnostic dialog box End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 19 Incoming Inspection Perform the Compensation This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument compensates properly Equipment required For sampling modules m 50 Q terminations on all electrical module channels Tektronix part number 015 1022 xx Dust covers on all optical module channels The sampling modules ship from Tektronix with the proper termina tions and dust covers installed Prerequisites First all sampling modules to be
123. 0 C Help Close Related control elements and resources HE M Select Action C Save C Recall Compensate All be Storage eer Factory 3 93 Measuring Waveforms Overview Select the 3 scope of the compensation Run the 6 compensation 3 94 To perform a compensation cont Wait until the Status for all items you want to compensate changes from Warm Up to Comp Req d or Pass In the Select Action fields select Compensate From the top pulldown list select the target to compensate Choose from All to select the main instrument and all its modules default selection Mainframe to select only the main instrument Module to select an individual module for compensation If you have selected Module as the target also choose the channel to be compensated from the pulldown list of channels Click the Execute button to begin execution of the compensation Instructions to disconnect inputs and install dust covers on optical module channels and 50 Q terminations on electrical module channels will appear on screen Be sure to follow static precautions see the user manual for your sampling module when following these instructions Note Failing to install the 50 Q terminations can yield erroneous compensation failures or results See Equipment Required on page 1 20 The compensation may take several minutes to complete Pass should app
124. 0 01 of interval 500 ps to 100 ns on any individual channel in 1 ps increments 1 The total number of samples contained in a single acquired waveform record memory length in IEEE 1057 2 2 1 2 This is for lt 100 kHz trigger rate The 80E04 sampling module is included in this specification Table A 3 System Trigger Description Trigger sources Auto normal mode Slope or select High frequency on off select Metastability Reject On Off select Gated Trigger Variable trigger hold off range and resolu tion CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Characteristics External Direct Edge Trigger External Prescaled Trigger Internal Clock Trigger and Clock Recovery with appropriately equipped optical modules Normal mode wait for trigger Auto mode Trigger automatically generated after 100 ms time out Edge mode Triggers on positive slewing edge Edge mode Triggers on negative slewing edge High Frequency ON mode Removes trigger hysteresis and improves sensitivity Should be used when trigger slew rate exceeds 1 V ns High Frequency OFF mode Retains trigger hysteresis and improves noise rejection at low slew rates Metastability Reject On mode Upon detection of trigger and holdoff collision time base will reject the sampled point Metastability Reject Off mode Allows metastable points caused by trigger holdoff collisions to display 5 V maximum See the Gated Trigger Input descriptions o
125. 000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms The vertical scale and position controls do not affect the vertical acquisition window rather they adjust the display system to display the waveform as follows m The vertical scale per division setting determines the portion of the vertical acquisition window that appears in the graticule allowing you to scale it to contain all of the window or only part Figure 3 2 shows two vertical acquisition windows that contain the entire waveform but only one window contains the entire waveform in the graticule on screen a Volts Div setting determines the size of the display graticule within the vertical acquisition window scale set to 50 mv div 0 50 volt Vertical window gt lt 0 25 volt cr gt Graticule a 0 25 volt 0 50 volt b Vertical position can change location of display graticule within 5 divisions position set to 4 divisions Vertical window gt 0 50 volt 0 45 volt gt Graticule e A 0 05 volt 0 5 volt Figure 3 2 Setting vertical scale and position of input channels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms NOTE Amplitude related automatic measurements for example peak to peak and RMS will be accurate for vertical wi
126. 00B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms waveform database You can measure the waveform instead of its database if you turn off Use Wfm Database in the Meas setup dialog box m If you assign a database to a waveform already being used as a source for an automatic measurement it will not automatically measure the waveform database you must explicitly specify its use by turning on Use Wfm Database in the Meas Setup dialog box High Low Tracking The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as the High Top or Low Bottom for a waveform influence the fidelity of amplitude and aberration measurements For many of the automatic measure ments supported the instrument automatically determines these levels and disables all or some of the High Low tracking method controls for example RMS If the measurement you select has High Low methods that are appropriate to adjust or example RISE time the instrument automatically enables the method controls for your adjustment as shown below Source Region HiLow FiefLevel i Tracking Method Auto C Min Max C Mode C Mean Select among methods lt VO High Check to use method you select lt uncheck to enter level directly M Track Low Low High Low Tracking Method Depending on which measurement you select High Low or both tracking will be enabled with their boxes checked as shown above You can select among the several modes the instru
127. 00B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition RZ Peak to Peak Noise The maximum range of the data distribution sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High or Low levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 PkPk noise Highpp or PkPk noise Lowpp The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width The High or Low selection for Noise At control in the Measurement Setup dialog specifies that the measurement is to be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 m Perform Autoset or otherwise optimize the vertical resolution before this measurement i e increase the overall vertical size of the waveform but without producing off screen waveform points See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS
128. 2 cece eee c cece evens 1 42 Table 3 1 Application based triggering eeeeee 3 43 Table 3 2 Defining and displaying waveforms 3 56 Table 3 3 Operations performed based on the selected waveform sesrrs iest Siacere de G06 waves wale Saas WES are 3 57 Table 3 4 Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations 3 61 Table 3 5 Customizable display attributes 500 3 66 Table 3 6 Cursor functions types ccc ee cece cece ees 3 85 Table 3 7 Cursor units 1 0 cc ccc cece ce reece reece enees 3 88 Table 3 8 Math expressions and the math waveforms produced 3 103 Table 3 9 Standard masks ccc cece reece reece cevees 3 142 Table 3 10 Histogram statistics 0 ccc cece cece eee cnees 3 158 Table A 1 System Signal acquisition eee eeeee A 1 Table A 2 System Timebase ssssssssessssscssessoss A 2 Table A 3 System Trigger cece cece cece cece ee nee A 3 Table A 4 System Environmental cc cece ee eeeee A 6 Table A 5 Power consumption and cooling 500 A 7 Table A 6 Display ccc cece cece eee e cece e eee enens A 7 able A 72 POrts ses seoc aged 6 bcc aid ates e brass wise sok wae alee A 8 Table A 8 Data storage 2 0 ccc ccc cece cece eee teens A 9 Table A 9 Mechanical 0 cece cece cece cece cece teens A 10 Table A 10 Certifications and compliances 5005 A I1 T
129. 5 Five years of calibration services Option D1 Calibration data report Option D3 Test Data for calibration services in Option C3 Option D5 Test Data for calibration services in Option C5 Option R3 Repair warranty extended to cover three years Option R5 Repair warranty extended to cover five years 1 43 Accessories and Options 1 44 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual EE ET Operational Maps This chapter acquaints you with how the instrument functions and operates It consists of several maps that describe the system its operation and its documen tation Documentation Map on page 2 2 lists the documentation that supports the instrument m System Overview Maps on page 2 4 describe the high level operating blocks and operating cycle of the instrument m User Interface Map on page 2 7 describes the elements of the User Interface UD application which provides complete control of the instrument m Front Panel Map on page 2 8 describes the elements such as control buttons of the instrument front panel and cross references information relevant to each element m Display Maps on pages 2 9 and 2 10 describe elements and operation of single graticule and multiple graticule displays m 1 O Maps on pages 2 11 and 2 12 describe front and rear input output ports and peripherals on the front and rear panels Tutorial procedures are available online as part of the online help To display select the Setup Pr
130. 8 m Printing Waveforms on page 3 132 m Remote Communication on page 3 139 Acquisition system Time base system Signal processing amp transformation system Output and User Interface storage and display Trigger system Saving and Recalling Setups Why Use This instrument can save a number of different instrument setups for later recall limited only by the space you have to store the setups Save and recall different setups to switch from setup to setup without having to first manually record your settings and then manually set them This capability is helpful when you want to m save and recall a setup that optimizes the instrument for displaying and analyzing a certain signal m save a Series of setups to help automate a procedure through recall of a sequence of saved setups as part of performance of the procedure m export a setup for sharing with a second instrument CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 113 Data Input and Output 3 114 What s Special What s Excluded Keys to Using Some features of note follow Commenting The Save Setup and the Recall Setup dialog boxes provide for including and viewing comments with your saved setups That way you can store information readable upon recall that describes each setup you save and its intended application Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name setup f
131. 8000B User Manual B 23 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Q Factor RZ RMS Definition A figure of merit of an eye diagram reporting the ratio between the amplitude of the RZ pulse to the total RMS noise on the High and Low levels The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High and Low levels are determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper and lower half of the pulse respectively The noise levels are characterized by ohigh and olow the standard deviations from the mean for the High and Low levels _ High Low RZQ Factor righ alow Where m High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels m ohigh and olow are the standard deviations The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel
132. A8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual
133. BE j j r _ Ma bases select different waveforms and time Magi amp Mag sources Met ng I bases Main C1 and Mag1 C2 for example appear if displayed ia Tip References and Math waveforms are listed as sources only if defined and turned on All sources listed for the Main time base are also listed for the Mag1 and Mag2 time bases if the time base views are displayed on screen End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 91 Measuring Waveforms Optimizing Measurement Accuracy Why Use Compensation To Compensate the Instrument and Modules Overview Prerequisites 1 Instrument should have the sampling modules installed and be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up The procedures given here will increase the accuracy of the measurements you take This instrument can compensate itself and the sampling modules installed optimizing the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure Compensation optimizes the capability of the instrument to make accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature NOTE After first installing a sampling module s or moving a sampling module from one compartment to another you should run compensation from the Utilities menu to ensure the instrument meets it specifications when reaching a stable equilibrium after power up normally 20 minutes is recommended You must save the compensation results or they will be lost when the ins
134. CONVENTIONS S v enrere e donk e r aa e Cine Aa a a Bava Sd Contacting Tektronix 2 eee cece cette een eee Getting Started Product Description 655020505 oes shieeie os ba Mae wood Sead aw a Rae Models Key Features minnaar aed once Bahasa gree dans Se dae Nee sane ack date Ga tee eel Product Software ish ved eek el ee Vee ee ks vel nes Wed see UEA Firmware Upgrades onst es cua ain cab a ae Pie Hala aig eee Sampling Modules Supported 0 0 cc eee cece eee eee Check the Package Contents 0 cece cece cece eee eeees Installation cs i c 03 ie Ses kerene deeds Wiawe Cae usa dat saved E RS Check the Environmental Requirements 00 00 cece eee ee eee Install the Sampling Modules 00 cece cece eee eee eee Connect the Peripherals seser minoriti eG ae iis Sea ee E ees Power On the Instrument 00 cece cece ee eee een A Powering Off the Instrument 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Gamma 00 ee eee Back Up User Filesi osi is tana ihe ce ae ye er ra CARE E See yen Software Installation 4 sews ease ie Vee each e A eae ep Description i pais asa seed voor NG Ades SROs A een ee Software Release Notes 0 cece eee eens Operating System Reinstallation 0 00 eee eee cee ee eee System Diagnostics cine ce eiwe kos cee eee a hae See Windows Safe Mode lt cscs ci eee saa FIARE tee ea eee eae See ewe ee Incoming Inspecti
135. CR operating in clock recovery trigger mode exhibits 3 5 ps RMS of edge jitter with no EMC field applied and for an ideal jitterless input then for applied fields up to 3 V m the edge jitter degradation would typically result in a total RMS jitter of Jitter lt 3 5ps 3ps 4 61ps EN 61000 3 2 AC Power Harmonic Current Emissions Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is connected to a test object Complies with EMC Framework per the following standard AS NZS 2064 1 2 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions To ensure compliance with EMC requirements only high quality shielded cables having a reliable continuous outer shield braid amp foil with full coverage low impedance connections to shielded connector housings at both ends should be connected to this product Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual A 11 Appendix A Specifications Table A 10 Certifications and compliances cont Category U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing mainframe Canadian Certification mainframe Installation Overvoltage Category Description Pollution Degree Descriptions Equipment Type Safety Class Overvoltage Category Pollution Degree Standards or description EN 61010 1 A2 1995 Safety re
136. EMC Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC General EMC EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage Standards or description Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when configured with sampling head modules designed for use with this instrument as identified in this manual Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union EN 61326 EMC Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory use Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions IEC 1000 4 2 Performance Criterion B12 IEC 1000 4 3 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 4 Performance Criterion B IEC 1000 4 5 Performance Criterion B IEC 1000 4 6 Performance Criterion A1 IEC 1000 4 11 Performance Criterion B 1 Performance Criteria C for USB keyboard and mouse Note that operation of the USB keyboard and mouse can be restored by unplugging and then reconnecting the USB connector at the rear panel of the main instrument 2 Horizontal timing susceptibility of the optical sampling modules and their internal clock recovery trigger signals usually increase the horizontal timing jitter when external electromagnetic fields are applied For fields up to 3 V m the increase in the horizontal high frequency RMS jitter is typically less than 3 ps RMS of jitter added using the square root of the sum of the squares method An example follows If an 80C01
137. F i After the waveform is defined use the Vertical This operation can be performed by selecting the MATH button with the waveform number buttons to Edit menu and then selecting Define Math turn the waveform on and off 1 The waveform number buttons affect C1 C8 R1 R8 or M1 M8 depending on the Vertical Source button you push CH REF or MATH Operations on Selected Waveforms In general the method of adjusting vertically scaling offsetting position and so on is from the front panel select the waveform using the Vertical source and waveform selection buttons and then adjust it using the Vertical Scale Offset and Position knobs Table 3 3 on page 3 57 summarizes operations you can perform for the three waveform types 3 56 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Table 3 3 Operations performed based on the selected waveform Control function Vertical Scale Vertical Position Vertical Offset Horizontal Scale Horizontal Position Horizontal Record Length Automatic Source Selection for Automatic Measurements Automatic Target Selection for Cursors Quick Horizontal Scale Adjust Zoom Waveform supports Operating notes c Ref Math h Yes _ If more than one time base is displayed these controls adjust the selected channel waveform in all time bases Vertical offset is unavailable for channel waveforms displayed with rho ye e e oahu Ye No All channel waveforms are adjuste
138. Figure 1 2 bottom configuration limits the input count to seven one from the large six from the small compartments NOTE Power is still provided to this small slot which does allow an 80A01 to be functional in this slot even when a large module is installed CH1 CH2 Eight channels Two large modules and lt three small modules NA NA CHS CHa CHS CHE CH7 CHE f N A N A Eight channels No large and four lt small modules ont cH2 cHs CH4 CHS CHE cH CH8 CH 1 N A CH 2 N A Seven channels One large module lt installed in either compartment and NA NA CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 three small modules L _ 1Not Available Figure 1 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations Install probes cables and other connection accessories to your sampling modules as appropriate for your application and sampling module Again consult your sampling module and connection accessory manuals Continue with the next section after installing the sampling modules CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 11 Installation Connect the Peripherals The peripheral connections are mostly the same as those you would make on a personal computer The connection points are shown in Figure 1 3 See Table 1 1 on page 1 13 for additional connection information WARNING Before installing peripheral a
139. GBASE X4 Ethernet OC 9 466 56 Mb s 10GBASE W Ethernet OC 12 STM 4 622 08 Mb s 10GBASE R Ethernet OC 18933 12 Mb s Infiniband Other OC 24 1244 2 Mb s 2GbE OC 36 1866 2 Mb s XAUI Near 0C 48 STM 16 2488 3 Mb s XAUI Far FEC2666 FEC11 10 Gb s OC 192 STM 64 FEC1066 OC 768 STM 256 ooo Wl FEC4302 Oo CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Mask Counts The instrument lists statistics for each mask polygon in the enabled standard or user in the Mask readout on the right side of the instrument screen Each mask is listed by its number with its count of hits the number of hits common to all masks and the total count of waveforms acquired Mask Editing Masks can be edited in which case they become a User mask Some tips on creating and using masks follow m When editing locate one point along the left edge or right edge of the mask further left or further right than any other point You can still create straight lines along the edge just place one point further left of right than the others on the edge m The vertices numbers increase according to their order from left to right The instrument reassigns numbers to vertices during mask creation or editing to hold to this rule m When adding new points to a mask the instrument determines their location in the mask as follows see Figure 3 26 a Defines an imaginary line between the left most vertex and right most vertex in
140. Gpy aveto E a ik T INEST Waverton Doete Wayet a Define Math Clear References Clear Data ORR A AAAIAL Select Refs 2 Click to select the reference to clear If you have a Clear Reference s HE keyboard installed you can hold down the control key Select reference s and click to select multiple references for deletion Click the Clear button to delete click the Close button to Cea Select All Deselect All dismiss the dialog box neo End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 127 Data Input and Output Exporting Waveforms and Histograms This instrument also supports export of a waveform or histogram to a file The instrument exports the data as comma separated ASCII text Why Use By exporting a waveform or a histogram you can use it with other analysis tools such as spreadsheets or math analysis applications Keys to Using The key points that describe operating considerations for setting up the exporting of waveforms and histograms follow m Waveforms export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are amplitudes without units There is no timing information but data is placed in the file in sequence from the first sample in the waveform record to the last m Histograms also export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are values without units One value is present for each bin in the histogram m Because the waveforms are exported as
141. MS noise Lowo The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time The High or Low selection for Noise At control in the Measurement Setup dialog instructs the measurement to be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Signal to Noise NRZ Signal to Noise is the ratio of the NRZ eye amplitude to the noise on either the High Ratio logical 1 or Low logical 0 level The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled and the mean of the histogram yields the High and Low levels The noise is defined as one standard deviation of the distribution within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture High Low
142. Meas Gf Vertical Bars Horizontal Bars up cursor controls Source Main Ci a Position Color 3 170 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help cont Control elements amp resources To dig deeper 6 You can search for in depth help using methods with Help Contents and Index which most users of PCs are familiar from the Getting Started Guide application menu bar select Help and then select Measurements Center Contents amp Index See illustration at right Measurements Reference Programmer Guide From the online help finder see below choose from the About TDS CSA8000 three tabs es Online Help Contents Index Find Click a book and then click Open Or click another tab such as Index Onscreen Keyboard Graticule display y Setup dialog box overviews Acquisition Setup QA Cursors Setup 2 2 Cursor fiction settings 2 Cursor 1 lettings 2 Cursor 2 lettings Display Setup Horizontal Sel Histograms S Mask Setup Measure Setu TDR Setup Print Cancel 8 Click the book icons to expose topic titles and then click a topic to highlight it Click the Display button to open the topic in a help window CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 171 Accessing Online Help Overview Control elements amp resources For instruction 9 You can display step by step setup instructions for p
143. Mode Sanpe TiafEnema Drect 2 7 foom BE soz a the screen and drag a box around the portion of the waveform you want to zoom 250 07 C3 50 00v w op0 neiv 24 poep E ran QQ Foose E pes eet CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 11 59AM 3713 00 3 63 Displaying Waveforms Overview To control the Main view cont Related control elements and resources Explore the 10 The next procedure describes how to set up and Mag time base control the Mag time bases controls See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 3 64 End of Procedure To Display Waveforms Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments ina Mag View you can make when using the Mag 1 and Mag 2 time base views Overview To control a Mag view Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Set up as from the last procedure See right See To Display Waveforms in the Main Timebase on page 3 62 Turn on a Mag 2 Push the Mag1 or Mag2 View button turns HORIZONTAL view amber to display a Mag view See right A numbered button lights when its waveform is on m Lighted green view is on but not selected m Lighted amber view is on and selected Tip Drag the divider bar between the two views to adjust the display height between them See the figure in step 3 3 64 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To control a Mag v
144. ON acquiring Acquisition will also stop when acquisition finishes if a selected stop condition is satisfied see step 4 on page 3 25 or if triggering ceases while in Normal trigger mode To clear an 4 Push the Acquisition CLEAR DATA button to discard the eee CO SUSITION acquisition acquired data in all channels For more 5 For more information on the controls described in this information procedure push the Acquisition MENU button Click the HELP button in the setup dialog box that displays Also see references listed at right See To Set Up Acquisition Modes on page 3 24 End of Procedure 3 26 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Acquisition Control Background This section contains background information on the data sampling and acquisition process that can help you more effectively setup the acquisition window of each channel This section m describes the acquisition hardware m defines the sampling process sampling modes and the waveform record m describes the acquisition cycle in Normal and FrameScan modes Acquisition Hardware Before a signal can be acquired it must pass through the input channel where it is sampled and digitized Each channel has a dedicated sampler and digitizer as shown in Figure 3 7 each channel can produce a stream of digital data from which waveform records can be extracted See Signal Connection and Scaling on page 3 4 for further description of scaling
145. See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RZ Extinction Ratio The ratio of the average power levels of the logic 0 level Low to the logic 1 level High of an optical RZ signal expressed as a percentage All level determinations are made within the RZ Eye Aperture io 1 Low RZ ExtRatio 100 x ton Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best measurement results m Always perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 17 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Extinction Ratio dB RZ Eye Height Definition The ratio of the average power lev
146. The latter method is useful when you need to rer manyay es manually align a bit or waveform to a mask on the display Enable 10 In the dialog box click to check the FrameScan p Frame Scan FrameScan Enabled box See right Check to gt I Enabled i Auto Position i i start scan Start Bit Scan Bits To restart the scan at the first bit at any time click the M BEA fer BEA Reset button Click to a fsa Help restart scan 3 34 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To acquire in FrameScan mode cont Control elements and resources Set a display 12 If you want to display the frame scanned acquisition as C1 nt mode an eye diagram set one of the following display modes A h Select Infinite Persistence or Variable Persis Copy tence in the Display Setup dialog box from the Send To Back application menu bar select Setup and then select Display w Show Right click the waveform icon left side of the screen in the waveform bar of the waveform being scanned and select Color Grade in the menu Properties For more 13 For more help on FrameScan acquisitions click the information Help button in the Setup dialog box to access contextual help on screen See page 3 167 to learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 35 Acquiring Waveforms To Catch a Bit Error FrameScan Acquisition when coup
147. Tool Bar Handy access to key features including the setup dialogs acquisition modes triggering modes and online help Measurements Bar Quick access to automated measurements by signal type and category click measurement buttons to measure the selected waveform Display Live reference and math waveforms display here along with cursors masks etc to analyze them Waveform Bar Access to waveform selection click waveform position drag and waveform properties right click Controls Bar Quick access to waveforms and timebases for display and to their scale offset and position controls for adjustment File Edit wiew 3etup Uth es Help Not Trig d Tektronix A T C RunyStop Acq Mode Sample Trig Estemel Direct jpo aH 50 h lala sfPutse 2 ampitude nmn ere ee E Sali C3 100 0rn idiv R1 100 0m civ R 100 0rnwidiw lt vince Main C3 Measurement High C3 A fooomw mf po aH n aa CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual fa 500r BH N 70 59 AM 9 5 01 Status Bar Trigger status and waveform count Readout Bar Toggle individual readouts on and off by clicking its button A Readout Right click any readout to display a short cut menu providing handy access to often used setup controls and properties for the feature associated with the readout Readouts Display up to five readouts in this
148. User Manual Tektronix CSA8000B Communications Signal Analyzer TDS8000B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 071 1099 03 This document applies to firmware version 2 0 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc FrameScan is a registered trademark of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If this product proves defective during its warranty period Tektronix at its option will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and l
149. User Manual 3 9 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set the signal input cont Related control elements and resources Set the 5 Push the View Main button to make sure the main time ACQUISITION horizontal base view is selected Use horizontal knobs to scale and i acquisition position the waveform on screen and to set sample ORONA ae ea window resolution a VEW q POSITION gt Scaled horizontally Positioned horizontally O RESOLUTION INCREASE Tew DETAIL q SCALE Pp The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion on page 3 19 Push Set to 50 if required to stabilize display Continue with 6 To finish the acquisition setup you must set the the acquisition acquisition mode and start the acquisition setup See To Set Up Acquisition Controls on page 3 24 For more help 7 For more information on the controls described in this procedure push the Vertical or Horizontal MENU button Click the HELP button in the setup dialog box that displays End of Procedure 3 10 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Autoset the Instrument With an input signal connected use the procedure that follows to autoset based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset operates on the selected channel only Overview To autoset Control elements and resour
150. When you assign a waveform database to a waveform source using the Waveform Database Setup dialog box you must explicitly turn on the waveform database display if you wish to see it on screen otherwise the waveform source displays using the default vector display The waveform database still accumulates in the background and can be turned on later without clearing the database Display Options The Color Intensity and Invert controls determine whether the instrument displays its databases graded by color or intensity Color Different colors are used to indicate data accumulation density Intensity Different shades of one color are used to indicate density m Invert When Invert is selected colors and intensities that are indicating high data accumulation counts toggle to indicate low counts Inverting the colors or intensities can sometimes make the data that occurs least in the waveform database easier to see CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases m Grading Method The Grading Method control determines the method by which database data bin counts are converted into display colors intensi ties EMPH8 selects a curve driven grading method that utilizes eight display colors intensities The curve is specified by the Emphasize Counts setting see Emphasize Counts below EMPH7 selects a curve driven grading method that utilizes seven display colors intensities The curve is
151. a EETA E EEES Frame Scan ACqQuisitins yess yor Or a EEE EREE EGS Wi Use E fs ta een a ENE he ape aar EE T A E EE OIA What S SpeCial arase POE EEEE EEE TEE EEES What sExcluded 2 4 64 ae up aera E Pewee Ot a EEEO S Keys to USME aa it EE A EE E E AE A E tegante To Acquire in FrameScan Mode oi srirerorererot disn eee eee Toi atcha BIC EMOR joi 8d Seah eee eae a ae ae ates E TY I I Ww m a a O O tt tr Pr OSS WD W amp W 1 a a NWRPrRODTUOMMAANIAINAANNRFPRRPWWRrRANNANA A Q a S a GD AY G2 L9G 99 GDS G9 O O EOI G9 G2 WWWWWWWNNNNNNNNNNNNNRR RB CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Table of Contents Triggerit 350 655 6 c45N SRS See Sie a ee EAEE seas tects 3 39 Bdge Triggering akoe epa ENEE es pet acetal tbe EELA aap eel See al 3 39 Why UST epearen ea 3 39 Whats Special sri ices cede eg 05 Sie PAEWAI 3 39 Keysto USING arrir ese ice ose pants Nise wl PHN west pats RN NS 3 40 To TEUTA EEA A al SRG ta thee ged Wael ae eS 3 48 To Use Gated Trigger sists ra ee Sek ae eds ee CR ees 3 50 Displaying Waveforms cc cee cece ccc c cece cer eneeees 3 53 Using the Waveform Display 00 00 eee cece eee 3 53 Why US oe sais f atiioe S earner sara da bodies ences aa conte aS 3 55 What Speca pye ene acing ea thar wute Tenants ART ee deavte e atone Mg 3 55 Whats Excluded occ ces eens tes rira Tara Ara AA areara 3 55 Keys TOUSE ee e a ea R E e a duane NA 3 56 To Display Waveforms in the Main Time Base View
152. able B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude B 2 Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing 000 B 8 Table B 3 Pulse Measurements Area 0 ccc eeeeeeeee B 14 Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude 0 000 B 15 Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing eee eeees B 29 Table B 6 RZ Measurements Area 0 cece cece ee eenee B 36 Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude B 37 Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing e000 B 50 Table B 9 NRZ Measurements Area cee cece ee eeeee B 55 viii CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ee a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of
153. abor or provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized representative from which the product was originally purchased For products returned to other locations Customer will be assessed an applicable service charge The preceding limitation shall not apply within the European Economic Area where products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service depot regardless of the place of purchase In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its authorized representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix or its representative with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix or its representative shall pay for the return of the product to Customer Customer shall be responsible for paying any associated taxes or duties This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair o
154. ack numbers of counts Clicking Clear resets those counts to zero and begins counting from zero 3 156 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview Set histogram dis play options Select Logarithmic to display histogram data logarithmi cally Bin counts are scaled logarithmically Logarithmic Set histogram limit 11 controls To take a histogram cont Use the Histogram to turn on and off the display of the selected histogram histogram counting remains enabled Use the color list to select a color for the histogram Select a value in the Size box to adjust the histogram display on screen Select Linear to display histogram data linearly Bin counts are scaled linearly by dividing the bin count by the maximum bin count scaling provides better visual details for bins with low counts Use the Top Bottom Left and Right boxes to set the size and location of the histogram box The histogram box selects the section of the waveform used for histograms Select Absolute to use units based on the source waveform Select to display the histogram box as a percentage of the graticule This display setting considers the top left corner of the graticule to be 0 0 and the bottom right corner to be 100 100 Tip It is quicker to use the mouse or touchscreen to drag to size the histogram box on screen then fine tune the values if needed with the Limit Controls
155. al Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ Low The logical 0 of the NRZ signal The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled a histogram is built from the lower half of the NRZ eye and the mean of the histogram yields the Low level The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 m Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Max The maximum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a wavefo
156. al inputs More specifically a probe attached to the Trigger DIRECT input may affect trigger level range resolution and units as follows m Trigger level units will match those of the probe m The trigger level for probes that have offset control is adjusted by changing the offset of the connected probe and is limited by the range resolution and offset characteristics of the probe m When a connected probe is removed and a different probe installed the instrument attempts to keep the same absolute trigger level as the current trigger level setting Note that the probe parameters range resolution offset scale and units that are relevant to the trigger circuit affect the Trigger Level control CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Gated Trigger Connector Option GT equipped You can attach a BNC cable to the External Gate input at rear panel TTL connection Two conditions must be satisfied to get a stable display of waveform data m The channel and trigger must be otherwise triggerable without the trigger gate m The gating signal must be at a TTL high the triggering system enabled and the instrument will acquire Note that the function of the trigger gate is to selectively exclude data from acquisition by means of gating the trigger on and off and it need not be synchronized with either channel or trigger See procedure on page 3 50 for more information on setting up gated trigger Enhanced Triggering T
157. ally switches to the Min Max or Mean method For example the Mode histogram operating on a triangle wave would not find consistent high and low levels so the instrument would switch to the Min Max mode Consistent high and low levels would be found on a square wave so the Auto mode would use the Mode method When setting High Low method be aware of these operating behaviors The tracking settings are not global that is you can independently set the method used for each of Meas 1 Meas 8 You can turn off tracking for either or both the High and Low levels and enter them directly Not all tracking methods are appropriate for all measurements If you cannot set the tracking method the controls will be disabled CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Reference Levels Method You can choose the method that the instrument uses to determine a second group of levels when taking time related measurements These levels are the High Mid and Low references For example the measure ment system takes risetime from the waveform edge segment that transitions from the Low to the High reference levels The instrument provides the following calculation methods refer to Figure 3 21 as you read about each method 1 Relative Reference is calculated as percentage of the High Low range High Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values from the High Level 2 3 Low Delta Reference is calculated as absolute values f
158. ame slope of the signal at the mid reference level Period Tcross3 Tcross1 Where Tcross3 and Tcross1 are the times of the first two consecutive crossings on the same slope at the mid reference level The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help and also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 Phase _ Tcross1 of source2 Tcross1 of source Phase 36 Tcross3 of source Tcross1 of source Where m Tcross of source is the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 1 m Tcross3 of source is the time of the next crossing on source 1of the same polarity as Tcross1 Tcross1 of source is the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 2 after Tcross1 of source1 All Tcrossings are at the mid reference levels which are adjustable and default to 50 of the pulse amplitude If measurement gates are enabled the measurement region is constrained between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 of the sources Pk Pk Jitter The delta between the minimum and maximum of time crossings of data sampled at the at the mid reference level Pk Pk Jitter Tcrosspp Where Tcrosspp is the difference between
159. an active math waveform or an active reference Display the waveform in the timebase in which you want to save it Main1 Mag1 and or Mag2 or the waveform will not appear in the Save Waveform dialog box For help in setup and acquiring waveforms check the references at right From the application menu bar select File and then select Save Waveform See right The Save Waveform dialog box lists all available waveforms for all displayed timebases allows for browsing to destination directory saving to file or for selecting a reference saving to one of R1 R8 It also includes a field for adding your comments See below Save Waveform s 7 x r Select waveforms File s File Path 9 C My Documents UINData M ainC1 wim el Comment Output 4 Test Seg A04 TP 101 z DUT PQuall4 Save Recorded 279 00 Eez By Alex T Evans ATE CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Control elements amp resources See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation See Power On Instrument on page 1 13 See page 3 24 for acquisition setup m See page 3 48 for trigger setup m See page 3 57 for time base display File Edit View Setup Utilities Hel Save Setup Recall Waveform Export Waveform Print Ctrl P Print Setup Recent hile Exit 3 121 Data Input and Output Overview To save a waveform cont Control
160. an use standard or user defined masks to set up the instrument to automatically detect mask violations in communications and other waveforms m Taking Histograms on page 3 154 describes how to take histograms to view the horizontal or vertical distribution of data on your waveforms m Using Waveform Databases on page 3 159 describes how to accumulate a waveform into the database and use the waveform database to view the waveform data weighted with respect to how frequently it reoccurs in the database Mask Testing Waveforms Why Use What s Special This section overviews the instrument features related to mask testing including how to create edit delete and activate masks You can select a standard mask edit a mask or create an new mask from scratch Use mask testing to test your waveforms for time or amplitude violations Mask testing will count waveform samples called hits or violations that occur within a specific area the mask Use the communications standard masks that this instrument provides SONET SDH Fiber Channel Optical and Electrical and Ethernet to test your signals or define your own masks Some mask testing features of note follow Flexible Mask Editing You can use the controls in Mask Setup dialog box to completely specify custom masks or edit existing masks selecting adding delet ing and placing a vertices in user defined waveform source units For quick edits you can use can use the mo
161. and a 10x attenuator are required to do these test procedures The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions properly The equipment required is intentionally kept to a minimum CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 21 Incoming Inspection Verify Electrical Input Channels 1 22 STOP These procedures verify functions that is they verify that the instrument features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits therefore do not interpret any quantities cited such as about five horizontal divisions as limits STOP DO NOT make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the instrument to default settings before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case go back to step 1 and repeat the procedure Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls Equipment required One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 Prerequisites At least one electrical 80E00 series sampling module must be installed as outlined in its user manual 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box 2 Set the Trigger System In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list
162. arch the help system for more information Overview To use the online help Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up and running m See Installation page 1 9 For a brief 2 Move your mouse pointer and let it rest over a control File Edit Wiew Setup Utilities Help description of that is a menu name a menu item tool bar button controls tool bar readout etc amp R te v i C Run S top Acq Mod When you perform this step the help system pops up a Pulse v Timing AET short definition or a label of the control See right 7 7 270 0r 3 168 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Accessing Online Help Overview To use the online help cont Control elements amp resources Fora more 3 Click the What s This button in the main display or in a __ a 5 x robust dialog box The button varies in form as shown at right description After clicking the mouse pointer changes to the following icon Ng Now click the control you want described A bubble pops up describing the control See below C1 10 m idiv __ E 21x What s This button for main display de S ample z Trig Internal Cle Wim Database Hist Cursor Meas Mak TOR Disp Ep MAE AR P Pe ET or Hoz Acq Trig gt Trigger Source Extemal Direct Extemal Prescaler What s This button for dialog boxes Internal Clock trigger
163. area selectable from the Readout Bar 2 7 Se ee ae Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Turn knob to adjust most control fields in setup dialogs Press the Select button to switch among fields Press the Fine button to toggle between normal and fine adjustment Press to start and stop acquisition or clear all channel waveforms at once Page 3 26 Press a Menu button to quickly access the setup dialog for its control group for more detailed set up Press to display measurement cursors and set the knob and Fine adjust and Select buttons to control them Page 3 89 Press to quickly return to instrument default control settings Page 3 13 Press to automatically set up the instrument controls based on selected channels Page 3 11 Y L Press to display the cluster of Setup Dialogs ieee _prunt DE EAL p FINE l Press to access print dialog for printing the display Page 3 131 for comprehensive set up of the instrument Press to toggle the touch screen on and off Use the 394 ne touch screen to control Ul when you haven t installed a mouse Page 3 60 VERTICAL Select a waveform type Channel gt Reference or Math to display or adjust on screen selected button lights Page 3 62 aS ee HORIZONTAL TRIGGER MENU MENU B Press to display and select a waveform not yet displayed gt
164. arger signal shows what really happens the offset moves the middle of the vertical acquisition window up and down on input signal Figure 3 3 shows how offset moves the acquisition window to control the portion of the waveform amplitude the window captured m Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC level of the input signal moving the waveform up on the display Likewise applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up moving the waveform down on the display See Figure 3 3 NOTE On screen the channel icon in the waveform bar points to the offset value around which the vertical acquisition window is centered The offset value pointed to is relative to the ground reference icon Both icons are shown in Figure 3 3 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Vertical window 1 V peak to peak fixed by sampling module used Offset 300 mV cop f Acquisition window shifts Near waveform top level positive to capture overshoot p3 Offset 0 0 V At waveform ground reference E p3 Offset 300 mV cr Acquisition window shifts Waveform bottom level N negative to capture preshoot Figure 3 3 Varying offset positions vertical acquisition window on waveform amplitude NOTE Measure
165. as saved Click the Recall button to save the waveform file To cancel without recalling a waveform click the Close button Recall your waveform CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual To recall a waveform cont Control elements amp resources Recall Waveform a okna AA EE 3 File name MainC1 wt Files of type Waveform tiles wrn vdb z Close Access to virtual keyboard Comment 0 DL utput 4 Te Recall into reference R2 empty Close Help 3 125 Data Input and Output Overview To recall a waveform cont Control elements amp resources For more 8 For more help on recalling waveforms press the Help information button in the dialog box to access contextual online help See page 3 167 to learn about using online help End of Procedure 3 126 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output To Clear References You can clear individual references of data individually or all at once If a reference is listed as active and you are sure you do not want the data it contains use the procedure that follows to clear it You can clear any of the active references R1 R8 Overview To clear a reference Control elements amp resources Display the 1 From the application menu bar select Edit and then File Edt View Setup Utilities Clear Refer select Clear References See illustration at right amp i C ences dialog box
166. ase When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The logical 0 level of the RZ signal The data within the Eye Aperture is sampled a histogram is built from the lower half of the RZ eye and the mean of the histogram yields the Low level The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertica
167. ata as new waveform records acquire resulting in a build up of data in all time slots Variable Persistence Set variable persistence time Infinite Persistence Variable Persistence to make data persist for a Access to virtual keyboard specified time New waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire but with continuous replacement of the oldest data If you select Variable Persistence set a time at which the oldest data is removed Continue with 7 For more ways to customize the display see the next the next procedure procedure See To Customize Graticule and Waveforms on page 3 69 End of Procedure To Customize the Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Graticule and Waveforms you can make Overview Customizations you can make Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform If the source to be measured is in the Mag1 or Mag2 See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page view turn that view on 3 48 for trigger setup CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 69 Displaying Waveforms Overview Customizations you can make cont Related control elements and resources Change wave 3 Right click on the waveform or its icon See right Waveform Icon form color or label Choose Properties from the menu that po
168. ations 3 108 take automatic measurements on 3 110 take cursor measurements on 3 111 Math Waveforms how to create 3 103 sources for 3 103 Math waveforms Glossary 6 expression syntax for 3 104 overview 3 101 source dependencies of 3 104 time base dependencies of 3 104 usage limitations 3 102 3 107 why use 3 102 Measurement Gated Glossary 4 High Glossary 5 Low Glossary 6 Measurement accuracy optimizing 3 92 3 100 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement level HighRef Glossary 5 LowRef Glossary 6 MidRef Glossary 7 MidRef2 Glossary 7 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods B 56 Measurements automatic 3 74 annotations 3 74 databases as sources 3 75 independent characterization of 3 75 statistics on 3 75 what s measured 3 74 why use 3 74 cursor 3 85 sources 3 86 what s measured 3 85 why use 3 85 cursor types 3 86 cursors and the display 3 86 how to localize gates 3 83 how to set sources for cursor 3 90 how to take 3 80 how to take cursor 3 89 tools for taking 3 73 Measurements automatic B 2 B 15 B 68 for Pulse signals definitions B 2 B 8 B 14 for RZ signals definitions B 15 B 29 B 36 NRZ signals definitions B 37 B 50 B 55 Reference B 1 Tracking methods B 68 Measurements bar 2 7 Measuring Waveforms 3 73 Menu Pop up Glossary 7 Menu bar 2 7 Metastability reject triggering 3 45 MidRef measurement level Glossary 7 MidRef2 measurement lev
169. atures of note follow Flexible Display Control Front panel knobs and buttons support quick access to the most often used adjustments those that display position and scale waveforms Mouse keyboard and touchscreen interfaces support complete setup of all the display parameters Multiple Time base Views Three views Main plus Mag1 and Mag2 can be displayed simultaneously each with its own time base Live waveforms are acquired independently in each time base C1 in Main is a different waveform than C1 in Mag1 or Mag2 All the displayed waveforms appear in each view that you display if C1 and M1 are displayed in Main they also appear in Mag and Mag if you display those views Reference waveforms will appear in all views as well but since they have a static time base setting the time base setting with which they were saved they will be identical in all views Fast Access to Zoom Waveform inspection has never been easier Just click and drag a box around the feature of interest and it zooms horizontally to fill the screen reacquired at a higher resolution Preview Mode The instrument automatically uses a preview display when control changes initiate reacquisition of waveform data A preview display shows how the waveforms will look when acquisition completes When the instrument finishes the processing of state changes it removes the preview and displays the actual waveforms What s Excluded Previewing of changes does
170. ay customizable attributes of 3 66 defined 3 54 elements of 3 54 flexible control 3 55 graticule defined 3 54 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Index horizontal reference defined 3 54 horizontal scale readout defined 3 54 how to customize 3 69 how to set style of 3 68 limit readouts defined 3 54 map Main amp Mag views 2 10 map Main view 2 9 mode Infinite Persistence 3 67 Normal 3 67 Variable Persistence 3 67 multiple views 3 55 preview field defined 3 54 printing 3 132 keys to using 3 56 setting high color 3 137 system Glossary 3 time base views defined 3 54 touchscreen defined 3 55 customizing 3 66 waveform 2 7 why use 3 55 zoom 3 55 Display controls purpose 3 55 vs Acquisition controls 3 58 Display menu Dots 3 67 Vectors 3 67 Display screen overview of 3 53 Display settings Horizontal position 3 59 horizontal reference 3 59 Displaying waveforms 3 53 Documentation online 2 1 online help system 3 167 Dots 3 67 Dots Display menu 3 67 Dragging mouse or touchscreen Glossary 3 E Edge trigger Glossary 4 Electrical modules installation 1 10 Electrical sampling modules specifications where to find A 1 Envelope acquisition mode Glossary 4 Environmental requirements installation 1 9 Equivalent time sampling random Glossary 4 Error detection Glossary 4 Error rate Glossary 4 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ESD and sampling m
171. aye te gn tee aceinteg B 56 Pulse SOULCES eriein aa s Sith a 8 tect a Me Solita g ha Ob Steere ote Rebs 3 B 57 RA SOULS yh eas thet hey a a bg oe a dig be BU Note a a Sa Rha g B 60 INRZSOULCES 5 55 dct ys Mand tesa ge a tsb tid ce oly ais tere te eal ee tak ye Maye Atego Beatie B 62 Tracking Methods eef erpe Sites gtd cael bv a Ye beeline bbb re ea We acetic g B 68 Mid reterence Level y 5cecia 8 ha tthe ytd a d ee e a ghee ate Matas B 69 To Optimize the Vertical Resolution 00 cee eee eee eee B 69 Use a Waveform Database 0 cc cece eens B 70 Glossary Index CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual v Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Compartments for sampling modules 1 11 Figure 1 2 Maximum inputs in three configurations 1 11 Figure 1 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 1 12 Figure 1 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations reat panel kois save Ses aioe oak Sevasd 6 WAGs eave Ore tg ae wate ee 1 13 Figure 1 5 On Standby switch location cece eeeee 1 14 Figure 1 6 Compensation dialog box ccc eee ee eeees 1 20 Figure 1 7 Hookup for electrical functional tests 1 23 Figure 1 8 Channel button location 0c cece eee eee 1 23 Figure 1 9 Channel button location 0 ce eee e ee eee 1 26 Figure 1 10 Optical channel verification 0 e000 1 27 Figure 1 11 Hook
172. be set to a more coarse slower horizontal scale than that of the Main When set to a more fine faster horizontal scale they can be thought of as magnifying a segment of the Main time base In short m each Mag time base scale sets the size of an aperture on the Main time base m each Mag time base position setting locates the aperture within the Main time base m each Mag time base graticule displays across its full horizontal width 10 divisions the contents of the aperture See To Display Waveforms in a Mag View on page 3 64 for a procedure that demonstrates this operating characteristic Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference The time values you set for horizontal position are from the trigger point to the horizontal reference point This is not the time from the trigger point to the start of the waveform record unless you set the horizontal reference to 0 See Figure 3 17 Trigger point 50 ms max gt Horizontal position Horizontal delay 19 ns min Time Time of first point Horizontal Time of last point zero reference point Figure 3 17 Horizontal position includes time to Horizontal Reference NOTE The time from the trigger to the time of the first point sampled is the horizontal delay Note that horizontal delay is set indirectly by the horizontal position and horizontal reference settings Time of first point Horizontal Position 10 divs x horizontal scale in sec div x Ho
173. between the mean crossings of the high reference level and the low reference level RZ Fall Time TcrossL TcrossH Where TcrossL is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the low reference level and TcrossH is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the high reference level See NRZ Measurement Reference Levels on page B 63 The adjustable low reference and high reference levels default to 10 and 90 of the NRZ eye amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 NRZ Frequency is defined as half of the inverse of the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points i e the reciprocal of the Period It would be the frequency of a digital signal of a 0 1 0 1 stream 1 2 x Tcross2 Tcross1 NRZ Frequency Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the two crossings See NRZ Crossings on page B 64 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically s
174. box button E dialog box button CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 61 Displaying Waveforms To Display Waveforms in Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments the Main Time Base View you can make Overview Set the vertical 4 3 62 display parameters To control the Main view Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See the sampling Module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 24 for acquisition Also an appropriate trigger signal must be applied to setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup in this manual the instrument and triggering must be set up Push a Vertical Source button turns amber to ee VERTICAL assign the numbered buttons 1 8 to operate on channel reference or math waveforms Push a REF numbered button 1 8 to select the waveform it displays A waveform button lights when its waveform is on m Lighted green waveform is on but not selected m Lighted amber waveform is on and selected Hint Step 4 assumes any reference or math waveforms you select are defined See Table 3 2 on page 3 56 if you need help defining these waveforms _ Lt a 2 a 3 _ 4 VW 5N L J ae 6 SS a 7 VW n 8 LJ Use the Vertical knobs to achieve a good display of each
175. button of the selected view is always lit amber m Turn off the selected Mag view Once selected press the Mag1 or Mag2 button to turn off the time base The Main time base becomes the selected time base Operations on the Selected Time Base View The method of adjusting horizontal scaling and positioning setting resolution record length and so on is from the front panel select the time base using the Horizontal time base selection buttons CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 57 Displaying Waveforms 3 58 and then adjust it using the Horizontal Scale Resolution and Position knobs Only channel waveforms can have their horizontal parameters set directly Table 3 3 shows how horizontal operations relate to the waveform types the key points to remember follow As Table 3 3 shows horizontal operations affect all channel waveforms but in the selected view only For example you can select each time base in turn and set one horizontal scale for all channel waveforms in the Main view another horizontal scale for those in the Mag1 view and a third for those in the Mag2 view The instrument displays a reference waveform with horizontal settings in effect at the time it was saved You cannot adjust these settings the instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a reference waveform See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 120 for more information on reference waveforms The instrument displays a math wav
176. by button You do not need to close the UI application or Windows before using the On Standby button To completely remove power to the instrument first soft power down the instrument using the On Standby button and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Gamma Back Up User Files Software Installation Although this instrument is set for optimal Gamma display before shipping you can adjust it to suit your preferences If you wish to do so use the Display settings located in the Windows Control Panel You should back up your user files on a regular basis Use the Windows Back Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk The Back Up tool is located in the System Tools folder in the Accessories folder 1 Minimize the UI application by clicking the minimize button in the upper right corner on screen 2 Click Start in the Task bar to pop up the Start menu 3 Select Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Backup in the Start menu 4 Use the backup tool that displays to select your back up media and to select the files and folders that you want to back up Use the Windows online help for information on using the Backup tool You can back up to the floppy drive or to a networked storage device over the ethernet port rear panel 5 You can restore the UI application to the screen by clicking its button in the Windows Task bar This section describes how to install
177. call the compensation results Note The Factory compensation should only be recalled to bring the instrument to a known state Recalling the Factory compensation does not guarantee measurement accuracy End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Related control elements and resources gt Select Action gt C Recall C Compensate All nd M Storage User gossese sssee seq All X d Storage 6 User Em C Factory Execute 3 95 Measuring Waveforms To Deskew Channels When making differential common mode or other measurements you may need to null out the propagation delay contributed by the input cabling between two or more channels Use the following procedure to adjust the deskew between channels NOTE When deskew is applied between channels within the same sampling module the time shift is accomplished by making a second waveform acquisi tion In this case waveform sample points for the two channels are not acquired on the same trigger event This means that if the input signals are eye patterns multi valued from one trigger event to the next then math waveforms that depend on correlation between samples from the two channels will not operate as expected For instance the difference between two channels C1 C2 will result in an eye pattern with a line of data points through the vertical center of the eye If you intend to create an ey
178. cations An incoming inspection includes the following parts m Perform the Diagnostics on page 1 18 runs the internal diagnostics m Perform a Compensation on page 1 20 runs the self compensation routine m Perform the Functional Tests on page 1 21 uses the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to verify that the instrument is functioning m Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests Windows 98 only on page 1 38 uses a software program called QAPlus Win to verify instrument hardware and the MS Windows 98 operating system is functioning QAPIlus Win is only available on instruments using the MS Windows 98 operating system Instruments using the MS Windows 2000 operating system do not include QAPlus Win software NOTE The procedures that follow contain instructions based on the menus and controls supported by the version 1 5 release and later of the instrument firmware The procedures will work for earlier versions of software but the control and menu names may vary slightly If the instrument fails any test within this section it may need service To contact Tektronix for service see Contacting Tektronix on page xiii of Preface Make sure you have put the instrument into service as detailed in Jnstallation starting on page 1 9 Then assemble the following test equipment and proceed with the procedures that follow To complete the incoming inspections procedures requires the following test equipment
179. ccessories to connectors mouse keyboard etc power down the instrument See Powering Off the Instrument on page 1 15 Monitot SVGA OUT Printer LPT L RS 232 a COM D Network cssccssssessesseeee Audio line Out 000 Audio line i sesseseeseeeee Removable hard drive CD drive essssseseseees disc F EAS T GO nll ED gt com 00 SVGA OUT e gy fe j6 0 0 OO CI Coe hp GPIB PCMCIA IEEE STD 488 PORT SCOPE ONLY TYPE 2 TYPE 3 VGA OUT Q GPIB GPIB IEEE STD 488 PORT SCOPE ONLY Monitor VGA OUT Card slot eS M Ses 3 oe CEETTEEETTTI O Gated trigger REGER only available with Option GT GATE TTL 1Product ships with a USB keyboard that plugs into the USB port and a USB mouse that plugs into the back of the keyboard 2PCMCIA card readers are not available on the following products CSA8000B SN B020338 and above TDS8000B SN B020346 and above Product software version 2 0 or greater does not support PCMCIA readers Figure 1 3 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel 1 12 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Installation Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information Ite
180. ce CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Return to Zero RZ A waveform type for of a source to be measured see waveform types Real time sampling An alternate sampling mode where the instrument samples to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event This instrument does not use real time sampling it samples sequentially See Sequential equivalent time sampling on page Glossary 9 Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Reference memory Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The instrument saves the data even when the instrument is turned off or unplugged Reference waveforms Waveforms that are static not live see live waveforms Reference waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references or to files in the instrument file system Once saved they do not update Sample acquisition mode The instrument creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval That is the default mode of the acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base display The time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of capturing an analog
181. ces Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place Signals must be connected to channels A triggering source must be provided At least one channel must be turned on its front panel F h ing i button lighted See the sampling module user manuals for help with installing sampling modules See page 3 48 in this manual for trigger setup information Execute 3 Push the Autoset button to to execute an autoset on the selected waveform If you use Autoset when one or more channels are displayed the instrument uses the selected channel for horizontal scaling Vertically all channels in use are individually scaled Note Autoset can execute on live waveforms either channel or math in the Main time base CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 11 Acquiring Waveforms Overview Click Define Autoset in the Utilities menu to display the Autoset properties dialog box To change the autoset criteria select from m Edge to setup the default autoset for instrument to acquire the waveform data such that the center 20 of the record contains a rising edge Period to setup the default autoset for instrument to acquire the waveform data such that the record contains 2 or 3 periods NRZ Eye to setup the default autoset for instru ment to acquire the waveform data as follows m one bit two eye crossings is displayed over about 7 5 horizontal divisions centered on the screen
182. ch of the vertical acquisition window appears on screen Provides output and sometimes input of instrument data elements in a form suitable to the user The process overview that follows describes each step in the top level cycle of instrument operation CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 2 5 System Overview Maps Process Overview Map Process overview Reset Abort Power On Stop condition Implement setup Wait for trigger accept trigger Wait Delay time Add one sample interval to Delay time Take 1 sample per active channel Waveform record complete Waveform available 1 Note if acquiring when powered down the oscilloscope may skip the idle state and resume acquisition starting with step 3 2 6 Process block description 1 The instrument starts in the idle state it enters this state upon power up upon receiving most control setting changes or upon finishing acquisition tasks 2 When you toggle its RUN STOP control to RUN the instrument implements its setup based on the current control settings upon start up these are default or last setup depending on user set preferences 3 The instrument then begins waiting for a trigger No sampling takes place until triggering criteria are met or a free run trigger is forced Auto trigger mode only The instrument accepts trigger 4 The instrument then waits a delay time that is it delays taking a sample until a spec
183. channel button for the channel you connected to in step 2 See Figure 1 12 on page 1 29 The button lights and the channel display comes on Turn the Vertical SCALE knob to set the vertical scale to 20 mV div The channel scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule VERTICAL VIEW 2 db fo 7 D m Figure 1 12 Channel button location 4 Set the time base Set the Horizontal SCALE to 1 us div The horizontal scale readout is displayed in the Control bar at the bottom of the graticule a Set the display for Normal and Show Vectors enable See To Set Display Styles on page 3 68 Rotate vertical OFFSET knob counterclockwise so that the base of the square wave is about 2 divisions below the center graticule NOTE Otherwise no vertical trace will be seen for rise and fall 5 Verify that the Main time base operates Confirm the following statements are true CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual One period of the internal clock signal a square wave is about five horizontal divisions on screen See Figure 1 13 on page 1 30 1 29 Incoming Inspection NOTE At some temperatures there may be extraneous data points after the first half cycle when viewing the front panel Internal Clock output as is done in this step This behavior may also occur when viewing multiple cycles in TDR mode In both cases this behavior is normal m Rotating the Horizontal
184. ck the Raila Condition option under Stop After Mask Total Hits x 8 In the Condition pulldown list select Mask Total Hits 1 and set a count of one in the count box These settings acer will stop acquisition on a violation of any of the masked he areas on screen See below Filename fl Waveform C155 00pWwdiv E riskiin c OC 125TH A _ Waveforms 195 207 Onsifiv ie Mbits sec For more 9 For more help on using FrameScan acquisitions click information the Help button in the Horz Setup dialog box to display contextual help on screen See page 3 167 to learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 37 Acquiring Waveforms 3 38 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Edge Triggering Why Use What s Special To properly acquire waveforms to sample a signal and assemble it into a waveform record you need to set up the instrument trigger conditions This section provides an overview of the instrument trigger features and their use Signal processing amp transformation system Output and User Interface storage and display Acquisition system Time base system The instrument supports direct edge triggering which triggers as described in Keys to Using on page 3 40 You must provide an external trigger source except when using clock recovery triggering from an optical sampling module equipped wit
185. connector on the front panel 1 The input resistance at the external direct trigger input and the maximum input voltage 2 Maximum signal input for maintaining calibrated time base operation 3 Section 4 10 2 in IEEE standard number 1057 The minimum signal levels required for stable edge triggering of an acquisition Table A 4 System Environmental Description Dynamics Atmospherics Electrostatic dis charge susceptibility Characteristics Random vibration operating 0 22 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total Random vibration nonoperating 2 28 g rms from 5 to 500 Hz 10 minutes each axis 3 axis 30 minutes total non operating Temperature Operating 10 C to 40 C 0 C to 35 C for 80E0X modules on Tektronix part number 012 1569 00 2 meter extender Nonoperating 22 C to 60 C Relative humidity Operating 20 to 80 with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C at or below 40 C upper limits derates to 45 relative humidity at 40 C non condensing Nonoperating no floppy disk in floppy drive 5 to 90 with a maximum wet bulb temperature of 29 C at or below 60 C upper limits derates to 20 relative humidity at 60 C non condensing Altitude Operating 3 048 m 10 000 ft Nonoperating 12 190 m 40 000 ft Up to 8 kV with no change to control settings or impairment of normal operation Up to 15 kV with no damage that p
186. coupled input resistance divide by eight prescaler ratio fixed trigger input charac level zero volts teristics External prescaled 2 5 Vpp trigger absolute maxi mum input External prescaled The limits are as follows trigger sensitivity Frequency range Sensitivity 2 3 GHz 800 MVpp 3 10 GHz 600 MVpp External prescaled Frequency range Sensitivity trigger sensitivity typ p ical 10 12 5 GHz 1000 MVpp typical External prescaled 1 3 ps RMS 10 ppm of horizontal position or better trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode maximum External prescaled 0 9 ps RMS 5 ppm of horizontal position typical trigger delay jitter Short term optimized mode Typical External prescaled 2 5 ps RMS 0 04 ppm of horizontal position or better delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode maximum External prescaled 1 6 ps RMS 0 01 ppm of horizontal position typical delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode Typical External prescaled Enhanced Triggering Metastability Reject on Zero typical trigger metastability CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual A 5 Appendix A Specifications A 6 Table A 3 System Trigger cont Description Internal clock trigger rates Characteristics Rate selectable at 25 50 100 and 200 kHz internally and is provided to the trigger to the TDR stimulus drives in small sampling module interfaces and to the Internal Clock Out
187. ct stp in the Save as type list box as the type of file Setup files are always type stp Tip Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at stp Enter a useful comment about each setup you save Write the comment such that it explains the purpose of the saved file when that file is later accessed see right Tip Use comments frequently The comment that you enter appears when you or others later select your setup in this dialog box or in the Recall Setup dialog box In the first case it might help you avoid overwriting a setup you wanted to keep in the second case it can help determine the purpose of the setups saved earlier Click the Save button to save the setup file To cancel without saving click Cancel button For more help on saving setups click the Help button in the Setup dialog box to access contextual help on screen End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ProtoE vals01 stp CommT est01 stp Rets1 stp MENEN File name Setup stp a Save as lype Setup Files stp A Cancel Access to virtual keyboard Serpe JEH ISS LHJ Comment Does TDR on StarComm proto a Requires S80E04 Sample Module installed in C1 C2 See Test Spec StarComm_TDRO34 z BL Cancel Help See page 3 167 to learn about using online help 3 117 Data Input and Output To Recall Your Setup Use
188. d Stop Gate G2 For best results optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Return to Zero RZ Measurements Amplitude Table B 4 describes each RZ measurement in the amplitude category See Table on B 5 on page B 29 for timing category measurements see Table B 6 on page B 36 for area category measurements Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude Name Definition RZ AC RMS The root mean square amplitude minus the DC component of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RZ Amplitude The difference
189. d a vertex to the selected mask After clicking Add click the location on the selected mask in the graticule where you want to the new vertex added Click Delete to delete the selected vertex from the selected mask Note When you add or delete a vertex the Mask list is updated to show the new number of vertices for each mask Click End Mask Edit to close the Mask Edit dialog box and return to the Mask Setup dialog box End of Procedure Related control elements amp resources 4 Vertices Mask 3 4 Vertices Mask 4 Not Defined Mask 5 Not Defined Mask 6B Not Defined Mask Not Defined Mask 8 Not Defined Vertex Wertex Number fi aH Horizontal Vertical 16 08n aH 500 0m aH Add Delete CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Counting Masks Mask counting statistics are displayed in the mask readout at the right side of the display Mask counting statistics are displayed as soon as you enable a mask and stay visible even if the mask isn t displayed on screen Waveform C1 100 Om Vide Maskihin C1 User Maski 16 Mask2 267 Mask3 165 Mask number and hits count Total 448 Total number of hits in all masks Wims 11 lt Total number of waveforms for all masks If mask counting is enabled read the results as follows m Mask n Each mask in the standard is listed by number Mask 1 for example along side th
190. d eye aperture center 20 of the eye to align the input signal to the NRZ mask Mode sets the Mask Autoset to use the High level topline and Low level baseline taken across one unit interval of the eye diagram to align the input signal to the NRZ mask From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Acquisition Inthe Acq Setup dialog box see right check the Condition option under Stop After Inthe Condition pulldown list select a mask related criteria such as Mask Total Hits and set a count such as 1 in the count box These settings will stop acquisition when mask violations satisfy the criteria you set here See below Push the RUN STOP front panel button to restart acquisition if stopped CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Related control elements amp resources m Autoset HiLow Method Automatic f Mean f Manual C Mode Autoset r Stop After Aun Stop Button Only Condition Mask Total Hits E 1 r Stop Action None he Filename ei 3 147 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To mask test a waveform cont Related control elements amp resources REET C155 OOpwediv _ J Waveforms 195 po ot a Tg 201 Opsrdiv Mbits sec Restart testing 14 To restart after a Stop After condition occurs push the ees ACQUISITION front panel CLEAR DATA front pane
191. d globally in the selected time base Math waveforms are not adjusted because their horizontal parameters Ye No No are derived from their sources Reference waveforms are not adjusted V because they have fixed horizontal parameters determined at the time Yes No No the waveform was saved Yes Yes Yes Measurements if selected from Measurements toolbar use the selected waveform as the measurement target Yes Yes Yes If cursors are off pushing the Cursor button on the front panel turns cursors on with the selected waveform as their target Yes Dragging a box around a portion of the selected waveform adjusts horizontal scale to fill the screen with the boxed portion see Quick adjust the time base on page 3 63 Graticules One graticule is displayed for the Main time base and an additional graticule is displayed for each Mag time base that you turn on Figure 3 16 on page 3 54 shows the elements of the time base graticules the elements are the same for each time base displayed Using Multiple Views The methods of displaying turning on and selecting any time base view follow m Turn the view on Press the Mag1 or Mag front panel button once to turn on the Mag1 or Mag2 time base The Main view is always displayed you cannot turn it off Turning on a time base makes it active selects it for adjustment m Select among displayed views Press any time base view button to make it the active selected time base The
192. displacement from the source ground times the source volts div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different volts div settings Vertical cursors measure distance time in seconds or bits Each REN NS Trigger point cursor measures with respect to ti 1 501us i f t2 4 006us t1 Time at Cursor 1 with respect to the trigger point At 2 505us i 1f t 399 2KHz t2 Time at Cursor 2 with respect to the trigger point Vertical cursors At Time at Cursor 2 Time at Cursor 1 1 At 1 Time at Cursor 2 Time at Cursor 1 Time is divisions of displacement of the cursor from its source trigger point times the source time div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different time base Main Mag1 Mag2 settings Waveform cursors measure both voltage and time Each cursor is in effect both a vertical and horizontal cursor Neither ofthese paired wi 199 6m Trigger point cursors can be moved off the waveform v2 200 6m C Av 400 2mv Note that sources can have different volts div settings ti 1 508us t2 3 178us At 1 67us Waveform cursors ifAt 598 8KH2 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 85 Measuring Waveforms What Sources Can Measure Keys to Using Cursors 3 divisions at 100 mV div 3 divisions at 20 mV div 3 86 Cursors can measure channel reference and math waveforms as wel
193. down list and buttons see right IET HE destination to navigate to the directory which contains a setup that Lookin S MyDocuments AA EE you want to recall 3 118 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To recall your setup cont Control elements amp resources Select your 4 If not selected select stp in the Save as type list box setup of file to include in the dialog box file listing Setup files are always type stp Tip Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at stp Choose your setup file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields View any in 6 Read the comment associated with the setup you cluded com choose if any is present It can contain information about ment optional using the setup you are about to restore see right Tip Selecting a file displays any comments that were entered when the setup was saved Comments can help you ascertain the purpose of the setups saved earlier Recall your 7 Click the Recall button to save t
194. e cont Name NRZ Average Optical Power dBm NRZ Average Optical Power watts Definition The true average component of an optical signal expressed in decibels This measurement results from the use of a hardware average power monitor circuit rather than from the calculation of digitized waveform data Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To determine NRZ Average Optical Power dBm this measurement simply converts average optical power watts to decibels using a log10 function referenced to 1mW To determine average optical power in watts see the NRZ Average Optical Power Watts measurement See below For best average optical power measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box m Compensate the optical channel which corrects for minor DC variances in the average power monitor as part of the compensation routine To access choose Compensation in the Utilities menu of the application DC Signal Current DC amps Conversion Gain amps watts Average Optical Power watts where DC Signal Current is the O E converter photo detector current in
195. e and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 Cycle RMS The root mean square amplitude of the waveform within the first period of the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 3 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude cont Name Gain High Low Max Mean B 4 Definition The amplitude gain between two waveforms The measurement returns the ratio between the amplitudes measured within the measurement regions of the two sources _ Amplitude Amplitude2 Where Amplitude1 and Amplitude2 are the Amplitude measurements of the two source waveforms See Amplitude on page B 2 Gain If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 of the two sources See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83
196. e aperture of the logical 1 and 0 regions of the pulse B 58 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Overshoot Levels Ee Eye aperature Power logic 1 Le Torbssa a Ye Lt j 1 i Power logic0 Figure B 5 Overshoot levels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 59 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods RZ Sources RZ Measurement Reference Levels B 60 16 7 Orn The automatic measurement system uses the following levels when measuring RZ source waveforms For the RZ measurements and their definitions that use the levels described here see page B 15 The following levels are used when deriving measurements on RZ waveforms Y TcrossH High reference Low reference 4 000psd ivj Figure B 6 RZ measurement reference levels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods RZ Crossings The following measurement parameters are used when deriving RZ measure ments 16 70 Yy Mid reference Teross1 Tcross3 l ae a Figure B 7 RZ crossings CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 61 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods RZ Eye Aperture The following parameters are used when deriving measurements on RZ Parameters waveforms 16 70m Eye aperture G iii ie dat High Mid reference High reference
197. e available depending on the sampling modules installed Each channel can be displayed as a waveform or can contribute waveform data to other waveforms math and reference waveforms for example CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 5 Acquiring Waveforms 3 6 A A CAUTION Install sampling modules before applying power and before connect ing them to the signals you want to test See your sampling module user manual for instructions CAUTION Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual Coupling Concerns Electrical sampling modules provide only straight DC coupling to their sampling circuits with no protection All modules specify a maximum vertical nondestructive range that limits signals to small levels typically about 2 to 3 volts DC ACpk pk See Specifications in the user manual for your sampling module for exact limits Do not exceed the limit even momentarily as the input channel may be damaged All modules also specify a dynamic range that if exceeded could cause acquisition and measurement errors due to nonlinearity Do not exceed this limit See Specifications in the user manual for your sampling module for exact limits NOTE Optical sampling modules may have dynamic range exceeded without obvious visual indications onscreen because the photo detector and or filters used may
198. e number of hits in that mask m Total Displays the total of all hits in all masks Wfms Displays the number of waveforms that have been tested against the masks To zero the counts for all masks click Clear in the Mask Setup dialog box NOTE Executing Clear will clear not only the mask counts but also the underlying waveform data For example if mask testing on a waveform database the database data is cleared and accumulation is restarted and if mask testing on a waveform being averaged or enveloped Clear restarts the averaging or enveloping CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 151 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Create a New Mask Masks are created by connecting the points independently of the order they are entered Points are connected by sorting the points in left to right order and grouping them across a diagonal from the left most point to the right most point If two points share a horizontal position along either the left or right edge of the mask the diagonal runs from the top left most point to the bottom right most point Points below the diagonal form the bottom boundary of the mask points above it form the top boundary Use this procedure to create a new mask Overview To create a new mask Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have at least one waveform turned on and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed See Displaying Waveforms o
199. e pattern with a math waveform between two channels in the same sampling module deskew should be set to exactly zero Skew must be eliminated with external accessories When deskew is applied between channels in different sampling modules the independent time base for each slot is programmed with a different delay value and the sample points are acquired on the same trigger event Overview To deskew between channels Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Drive the channels with signals requiring deskew Function generator Drive the trigger direct input with the function generator trigger output Set the instrument to trigger on the slope of the waveform that matches that of the edges you want to deskew Display the signals on screen Trigger output 3 96 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To deskew between channels cont Control elements and resources Set up the 5 Set up the channel to be used as the reference channel _ ae e reference Co channel a Push the channel numbered button under Vertical 5 HORIZONTAL MENU MENU amp POSITION q POSITION D S fo Ss on the front panel Use the Vertical SCALE knob and POSITION knobs to display the waveform edge to be deskewed to fill the screen vertically lt p C ETE Use the Horizontal SCALE knob and POSITION knobs to display the waveform edges to be deskewed to
200. e within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative NRZ Area waveform t dt over the first NRZ bit within the measurement region When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 55 SSS 6 eS ae Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods All Sources Reference Level Calculation Methods High 50 mV High reference Mid reference 0 mV Low reference Low 50 mV B 56 This reference topic describes the reference parameters levels and crossings used in taking the measurements The methods available for calculating reference levels used in taking automatic measurement follow The methods are shown using a pulse but they also apply to RZ and NRZ waveforms Reference level calculation methods 1 Relative Reference is calculated as percentage of the High Low range 2 High Delta Reference is calculated as the absolute values from the
201. ead about communication error handling and other information on GPIB usage Information about other products is available on the Tektronix website See Contacting Tektronix for information on how to access our website These documents help you use various connectiv ity and analysis tools that you can install See Analysis and Connectivity Support in the instrument online help described above for more information Note that earlier instrument models TDS8000 and CSA8000 did not ship with these tools You may also want to obtain the optional service manual for this product if you carry out self service or performance test this instrument See Optional Accessories on page 1 42 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a 7 System Overview Maps The instrument and its sampling modules comprise a highly capable waveform acquisition test and measurement system The following model provides background information on its operation which in turn may provide you insight on how the instrument can be used Functional Model Map Modular Sampling Signal Processing Display I O User Interface Specialization Digital Signal Acquisition amp Transformation amp Storage amp Waveform Display Input modules Chan 1 8 Acquisition system Page 3 21 Page 3 14 CH1 8 Page 3 53 Clock recovery options only Trigger
202. ear 3 127 Related Manuals xii Release notes software 1 16 Remote communication 3 139 Reset How to execute 3 13 of instrument 3 13 Return to Zero Definition Glossary 8 Return to Zero RZ automatic measurements B 36 Amplitude related B 15 Area related B 36 Timing related B 29 RZ measurements amplitude B 15 RZ measurements area B 36 RZ measurements timing B 29 S Sample acquisition mode Glossary 8 Sample interval Glossary 8 defined 3 28 Sampling Glossary 8 modes 3 28 3 30 process defined 3 27 3 29 process illustrated 3 28 3 29 sequential equivalent time Glossary 9 Sampling modules caution avoid damage 3 6 installation 1 10 installation compartments 1 11 external attenuators with 3 6 preventing overvoltage 3 6 keys to using 3 5 selection 3 5 signal connection 3 5 specifications where to find A 1 static concerns 1 10 supported 1 4 Save and recall of setups adding a comment 3 117 usage limitations 3 114 Index 7 Index Save and recall of waveforms adding a comment 3 123 usage limitations 3 120 Save Mode if Windows starts in 1 16 Saved waveform saved Glossary 9 Saving a setup 3 113 Saving a waveform 3 120 Saving and recalling setups including comments 3 114 virtual keyboard with 3 114 why use 3 113 Saving and recalling waveforms including comments 3 120 virtual keyboard with 3 120 why use 3 120 Saving images PNG format 3 136 Scale considerations for setting
203. ear as Status in the dialog box when compensation completes If Fail appears as Status rerun the compensation If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service Related control elements and resources m Select Action C Save Recall Click to select _ Compensate compensate Choose targets to All v compensate Enabled only if module gt Z selected as target r Staege sg is Pactan Click to start gt Execute compensation CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To perform a compensation cont Save the 7 compensation Recalling a 9 compensation In the Select Action fields select Save Click the Execute button to save the new compensation results The new compensation results will be lost when the instrument is powered down if they are not saved The Storage destination for the compensation results is limited to the User area The Factory settings cannot be overwritten In the Select Action fields select Recall Inthe Storage field select the compensation to recall User or Factory User recalls the last saved user compensation Factory recalls the compensation established at the factory Note Before proceeding make sure you want to rewrite the compensation you just saved Click the Execute button to re
204. easurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Amplitude The difference between the logical 1 level High and the logical 0 level Low of the NRZ signal Both High and Low levels are measured within the Eye Aperture NRZ Amplitude High Low Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 37 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitud
205. eater does not support PCMCIA readers 2 12 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Overview Section Acquiring Waveforms Triggering Displaying Waveforms Measuring Waveforms Creating Math Waveforms Data Input and Output Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Accessing Online Help Cleaning the Instrument This chapter describes how the many features of the instrument operate Please note the following points on using this chapter m Each section in this chapter provides background information needed to operate the instrument effectively as well as the higher level procedures for accessing and using the features These procedures emphasize using the front panel when possible m Lower level detailed usage procedures are in the online help system The table that follows lists the sections in this chapter Page no 3 39 3 53 instrument provides and how to use them Provides an overview of how you can mathematically combine acquired waveforms and 3 101 measurement scalars to create a math waveform that supports your data analysis task Provides an overview of the input and output capabilities of your instrument 3 113 Provides an overview of the statistical tools this instrument provides and how to use 3 141 them mask testing histograms and waveform databases Provides an overview of the help system which is integrated as part of the instrument 3 167 user interface and describes how to access it Provides in
206. ecall Setup Recall Waveform Export Waveform Page Setup 1 Setup stp 2 Cunent stp SCAMy Documents Setup2 stp Bit 3 132 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Control elements amp resources To Print Waveforms cont Configure and 4 Configure your print job using the the standard Print Microsoft Windows Print dialog box that displays Pare HE Press the OK button to print your display EER Overview Tip Access the printer instructions or the Windows Name NEERA A Help system if you require more information on Status Default printer Ready rintin Type QMS 2425 Print System p g Where WTEKADM1542592c Comment QMS 2425 Print System B58 L2 Grid K14 I Print to file Print ranga Copies All Number of copies fi z C Pages from tp a oan f hat elel ale I Collate Cancel End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 133 Data Input and Output To Print Using To conserve ink and improve print quality when printing images of waveform Ink saver Mode displays you can use Ink saver mode Do the following steps Overview To print using ink saver mode Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 Waveforms must be displayed on screen 2 Your Printer must be accessible and configured properly m See Acquiring Waveforms on page 3 3 m See Triggering on page 3 39
207. econds sample x Record Length samples where Time Duration is the horizontal acquisition window time duration 3 Sample Interval sec sample Resolution sec sample 1 Sample Rate samples sec In 2 above note that it is Sample Interval that varies indirectly to accommodate the window time duration and its scale setting and the Record Length setting as these later two elements can be set by you These elements behave as follows m If Record Length or Time Duration vary Sample Interval varies to accom modate up to highest sample rate lowest sample interval highest resolution m If you set faster Horizontal Scale settings decreasing Time Duration and the Sample Interval reaches its lower limit the horizontal scale becomes limited to a setting compatible with the record length and the lower limit of the sample interval m If you attempt to set longer Record Lengths and the Sample Interval reaches it lower limit Time Duration remains constant and the record length becomes limited The equation becomes Maximum Record Length Time Duration Min Sample Interval For example at 1 ps div and 10 divisions the record length must be no more than 1000 points Max Rec Length 1000 samples 10 divs x Ips div 0 01 ps sample Max Rec Length 1000 samples CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 19 Acquiring Waveforms 3 20 NOTE Resolution and the equivalent elements sample interval and sample rate see equati
208. eee eee eens 3 90 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 92 Why Use sien cas eh Se eed AREARE NAERA dena Lae ee EE 3 92 COMPENSAtlON es sew es mek Se we Ew es he a SAS oe 3 92 To Compensate the Instrument and Modules 0 3 92 To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations 3 98 Creating Math Waveforms 5005 PE AREE 3 101 Defining Math Waveforms asii aE raen NERA ccc cece NAAA 3 101 WAP USE shi eG Se er a N ea Ee Ra E a eas E SA 3 102 WSE E SpE a a AA E atin A AS S ONAA A AE EER 3 102 Wiat aE ea aaa ia E aa Aaa O AA I E AAA 3 102 EESTE a aA Bate ea canta A A E a A AE A 3 103 To Define a Math Waveform sy uisi siss ana sA a E a 3 105 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual iii Table of Contents Operations on Math Waveforms 0 000 c ccc eee ee eee 3 107 Wy O T EE E Mansa leet coi Aviat Cantina etl Mi ae eects caer odes ut gives 3 107 What S Excluded s annn ah a E este ane ats ES 3 107 INC YS tO USING EEA sire A A E T love AA olen A 3 108 To Use Math Waveforms ininde ai ea E o A E A A 3 109 Data Input and Output 0 ccc ccc cece reece ence eee 3 113 Saving and Recalling Setups 0 0 cee cee eee eee 3 113 Why US6 ra eera de lpine ra E tae ler dh gs aes o Rat Cate EER 3 113 What s Special tics in EEEa Ri he Be ie Coe BNO eres 3 114 What s Excluded srogi iore Wi ee a BI eee 3 114 Keys to USINE lt 2 ctiie isserayle ae aue Re a ees Se
209. efaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See NRZ Eye Aperture Parameters on page B 65 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned or it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Eye Height A measure of how noise affects the vertical opening between the High and Low levels of an NRZ eye The NRZ eye is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High and Low levels are determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper and lower half of the eye respectively The noise levels are characterized by ohigh and olow the standard deviations from the mean for the High and Low levels NRZ Eye Height High 3 ohigh Low 3 alow Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels and ohigh and olow are the standard deviations The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture
210. eform The settings you make define the horizontal acquisition window described in Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 17 Good sample density might be at least five samples on each waveform transition when acquiring for timing measurements The trade off for increased sample density is increased time to acquire NOTE Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped that is the data is limited to the minimum and or maximum boundaries of the vertical acquisition window This limiting can cause inaccuracies in amplitude related measurements See Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 Trigger and Display Set basic trigger controls to gate waveform acquisition and use the display to interactively set scale position and offset waveforms See the sections Triggering on page 3 39 and Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 Selected Waveform Many of the controls of this instrument especially the vertical controls operate on the selected waveform The instrument applies all actions that only affect one waveform at a time such as applying a changes to the vertical control settings to the selected waveform NOTE You can select a channel waveform a math waveform or a reference waveform The procedures here describe how to select and set up channel waveforms for acquisition See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 for information regarding using the controls for adjusting display of
211. eform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 The time of a negative crossing defined as the mean of the histogram of the data sampled at the mid reference level Cross Tcross Where Tcross is the mean of the histogram of a negative crossing The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first falling edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing cont Name Definition RZ Delay The time interval between the crossings of the mid reference levels on the two sources of the measurement The crossing times are computed as the mean of the histogram of the data slice at the mid reference level RZ Delay Tcross source1 Tcross source2 Where Tcross is the mean of the histogram of a positive or negative crossing at mid reference level See RZ Crossings on page B 61 The mid reference level is adjustable and
212. eform on screen to use it as the source for the cursors m Once cursors are on selecting a different waveform does not change the source the cursors measure To change the source while cursors are on you must change the source in the Cursors Setup dialog box m Turning cursors off restores the default cursor source assignment so that assignment again tracks the currently selected waveform Cursors Can Treat Sources Independently Each cursor can take a different independent source with each source having its own amplitude scale and time scale Consider the example presented by Figure 3 22 on page 3 86 m Cursor is set to measure channel 3 C3 which is set to 100 mV div so the cursor readout v1 measures C3 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 100 mV div or about 300 mv m Cursor 2 is set to measure reference 1 R1 which is set to 20 mV div so the cursor readout v2 measures R1 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 20 mV div or about 60 mv m Note that the value of each graticule division relative to the delta readout is not readily apparent because the delta amplitude readout Av must account for the different amplitude scale settings of the sources To do so the Av readout displays the results of v2 v1 60 mv 300 mv 240 mv automatically accounting for the different scales of the cursor sources Time readouts behave similarly with regard to different sources with different time bases Each cursor displays its t
213. eform with the horizontal settings derived from its math expression You cannot change these directly the instrument disables the horizontal controls when you select a math wave form See Creating Math Waveforms on page 3 101 for more information on math waveforms All waveforms in each time base are displayed fit to screen that is within the full 10 horizontal divisions that the graticule provides Waveform Operations that Cross Time Base Views Unlike the horizontal controls just described some controls apply to all time base views Turning a waveform on or off in any view displays or removes it from all views Selecting a waveform in any view makes it the selected waveform in all views for example select C1 in Main and then select Mag1 C1 is the selected waveform in Mag1 Turn on Mag2 and Mag displays on screen with C1 selected Vertical adjustments on a waveform in any time base adjust the waveform in all time bases Display Controls vs Acquisition Controls For channel waveforms the vertical offset control and the horizontal controls you set adjust the instrument acquisi tion parameters See the following descriptions for more information Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 17 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Magi and Mag2 are Magnifying Timebases The Mag1 and Mag time bases are so named because they cannot
214. el Glossary 7 Mode trigger 3 41 Models instrument 1 1 Modes sampling 3 28 3 30 Modules sampling supported 1 4 Mouse operations equivalent with touchscreen 3 60 Non Return to Zero Definition Glossary 7 Non Return to Zero NRZ automatic measurements B 37 Index 5 Index Amplitude related B 37 Area related B 55 Timing related B 50 Normal display mode 3 67 trigger mode 3 41 NRZ measurements amplitude B 37 NRZ measurements area B 55 NRZ measurements timing B 50 0 Offset vertical 3 14 OMA optical modulation amplitude Glossary 7 On Standby button 1 13 1 15 Online documentation 2 1 Online Help 2 1 2 2 accessing 3 167 how to use 3 168 types available 3 167 Online help displaying control descriptions 3 168 displaying overviews 3 169 for Windows 3 174 full text search 3 173 keys to using 3 167 set up procedures 3 172 using the finder 3 171 why use 3 167 Operating system reinstall 1 16 Operation limitations automatic measurements 3 76 math waveforms 3 102 3 107 Operational limitations Histograms 3 155 Mask testing 3 142 preview mode 3 55 save and recall of setups 3 114 save and recall of waveforms 3 120 vertical offset 3 5 waveform databases 3 159 Optical modules incoming inspection 1 25 installation 1 10 Optical sampling modules specifications where to find A 1 Optional accessories list 1 42 Options list 1 41 Index 6 P Package shipping con
215. el High of an optical NRZ signal expressed as a percentage All level determinations are made within the NRZ Eye Aperture io 1 Low NRZ ExtRatio 100 x iam Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best measurement results Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and Gain User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ Extinction Ratio The ratio of the average power levels of the logic 1 level High to the logic 0 level Low of an dB optical NRZ signal expressed in decibels dB All level determinations are made within the NRZ Eye Aperture NRZ ExtRatio dB 10 x a Fe Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and d
216. el of the graticule for the selected waveform 4 Horizontal scale readout the horizontal scale of the selected waveform 5 Horizontal reference a control that you can position to set the point around which channel waveforms expand and contract horizontally on screen as you change the Horizontal Scale control 6 Preview a status field that indicates when all waveforms are being previewed that is displaying an approximation of the waveforms as they will appear when acquisition completes This indicator may appear when you alter acquisition controls 7 Main Magi and Mag2 views selectable objects displaying on screen in the display each with its own display of any waveform that is currently turned on A CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms view is a representation of a signal on an associated time base the Main time base with the Main view which is always displayed or one of the two Mag views each with its own time base and graticule The display of the Mag views can be turned on or off You can display up to three views on screen Main plus Mag1 and Mag2 at the same time Touchscreen not shown a feature that lets you touch controls on screen to operate the instrument See Mouse and Touchscreen Operation on page 3 60 Why Use Use display features and controls to view test measure and otherwise analyze your waveforms What s Special This instrument provides a robust display Some fe
217. els are adjustable and default to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 9 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing cont Name Duty Cycle Fall Time Frequency Definition The ratio expressed as a percentage of the first negative pulse width within the measurement region to the period of the signal The time intervals are determined at mid reference level If Tcross1 is positive then Tcross3 Tcross2 7 RUY GYRE INOS Tcross3 Tceross1 If Tcross1 is negative then Tcross2 Tcrosst ie ea Tcross3 Tcross1 Tcross1 Tcross2 and Tcross3 are the times of the first three consecutive crossings at the mid reference level The mid reference levels are adjustable and default to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The time interval between times of the high reference level and the low reference level crossings on the negative slope of the pulse RZ Fall Time TcrossL TcrossH Where m TcrossL is the time of the crossing of the low reference level
218. els of the logic 1 level High to the logic 0 level Low of an optical RZ signal expressed in decibels dB All level determinations are made within the RZ Eye Aperture RZ ExtRatio dB 10 x a Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results Always perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RZ Eye Height is a measure of how noise affects the vertical opening between the High and Low levels of an RZ pulse The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High and Low levels are determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper and lower half of the pulse respectively The noise levels are characterized by ohigh and olow the standard deviations
219. engths can vary over the entire allowable range To emphasize the data that occurs less frequently you can toggle the Invert Color Intensity control in the Waveform Database setup dialog box which reverses the intensity color assignments to each pixel in the database display m You can set any selected database to use a persistence mode to accumulate and display data Infinite persistence mode continues displaying waveforms as they accumulate until the selected database is cleared manually or by a control change Variable persistence mode keeps and displays accumulated data in the specified database until the user specified waveform count is surpassed Each waveform accumulated beyond the count removes the oldest waveform accumulated earlier in the database What s Excluded The following operations are excluded References as sources Because references contain static data that does not update they are not available as a waveform source for waveform databases More than four waveform databases More than four waveform databases cannot be created at one time Note the following behaviors regarding waveform databases m There are four waveform databases you can explicitly assign and reassign Databasel through Database4 to waveform sources in the Wfm Database dialog box m Once all databases are allocated the only way to assign a new waveform is to change the waveform source of one of the databases in the same dialog box which relea
220. enter screen 1 26 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection NOTE If the position knob was set to 0 000 you can confirm this in the Vertical menu use Basic button in the dialog box File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Waveforms 0 Tektronix X Ru p Acq Mode Sample x Trigfintemal Clock x a ae 50 r Fuse Z fAmpitude Pulse zjja Amplitude ai ial alo millet f Te ala B OOO H i i H Waveform C1 1 00m Wwdiv Baseline c1 Vertical offset C1 Control bar gt o zj F 000m E aj 2 000m main Q z J foo Ops di a Sons a 12 27 PM 3 22 00 Vertical offset setting Figure 1 10 Optical channel verification 5 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Push the front panel button Acquisition MENU to display the Acq Setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there may be a small amount of noise present on the baseline level m Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with any noise present reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed 6 Close Acquisition setup dialog box Push the Acquisition MENU button to close the Acq setup dialog box CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 27
221. ents transceiver subassemblies and transmission systems The instrument includes a user interface that runs on the Microsoft Windows operating system as a windowed application You operate the instrument using CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 1 Product Description 1 2 front panel controls with the mouse and keyboard or with the touch screen The installed Windows operating system MS Windows 98 or MS Windows 2000 is dependent on the purchase date or product upgrade status Key features include industry leading waveform acquisition and measurement rate with Sample Envelope and Average acquisition modes support for up to six sampling modules two large and four small modules for a maximum configuration of ten inputs Up to eight inputs can be active at a time See Maximum Configuration on page 1 11 supports integrated optical signal pick off and clock recovery enabling accurate triggering on optical communication signals support for optical modules with several integrated selectable reference receivers which eliminates the need for a multitude of add on reference receivers full programmability with an extensive GPIB command set and a message based interface true differential TDR with fast step 35 psec reflected risetime when used with a TDR capable sampling module industry leading trigger bandwidth 12 GHz when using the built in prescaler support of both telecom SONET and SDH and dataco
222. ents an overview of display operation in the topics Using the Waveform Display and Customizing the Display Acquisition Output and system storage Time base system Signal processing amp transformation system User Interface and display Trigger system Using the Waveform Display The waveform display see Figure 3 16 is part of the User Interface UT application The UI takes up the entire screen of the instrument and the waveform display takes most of the UI Some terms that are useful in discussing the waveform display follow CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 53 Displaying Waveforms 3 54 3 Upper limit of graticule p ane ENIE o selected waveform 1 Waveform display lt selected waveform 2 Graticule 5 Horizontal reference 6 Preview mode indicator nn rut wu 209 nn P S sate ate TH d n 7 aur Om gt 7 Main view gt 7 Magi view 25 00nsvdivg_ 4 Horizontal scale readout selected waveform Figure 3 16 Display elements 1 Waveform display the area where the waveforms appear The display comprises the time bases and graticules the waveforms masks histograms and readouts 2 Graticule a grid marking the display area of a view Each graticule is associated with its time base 3 Upper and lower amplitude limits readouts the upper and lower boundary lev
223. equisites 1 The instrument must be powered up with any waveform you want to display on screen See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup Access the 2 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities Display setup select Display See right Vertical dialog box Hori zontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask EEN Cursors Wet Database TBR Select normal 3 From the Display Setup dialog box see right choose Set Interpolation mode style vectors Normal to select a display with no acquisition data and interpola persistence tion Waveforms display with the new data from ongoing acquisitions replacing that data in the same time intervals slots but acquired as part of the last previous waveform Time I Infinite Persistence Check Vectors to turn on display lines between waveform dots uncheck to display only dots Select an Interpolation mode from the pulldown list Choose from Sin x x Linear or None 3 68 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To set display styles cont Related control elements and resources Selecta 6 From the the Setup Display dialog box see right persistence choose Mode IV Show Vectors Infinite Persistence to make data persist until itSelaton Sin you change some control such as scale factor or explicitly clear the data Waveform displays accumulate d
224. er MENU button to display the Trig Setup READY lights when the instrument acquisition system is running but the trigger system is not receiving valid trigger events This includes when auto triggering in absence of a trigger TRIG D lights when the instrument acquisition system is running and the trigger system is triggered READY and TRIG D are always off if acquisition is stopped dialog box From there you can Switch between Auto and Normal trigger modes If you have trouble triggering you can adjust holdoff which may help For assistance with this control see step 8 You may on occasion want to turn off metastable rejection again see step 8 for more information Press the Help button in the Trig Setup dialog box to access the online assistance specific to triggering commands You can also read about key trigger features in Keys to Using on page 3 40 End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual To trigger cont Control elements and resources LEVEL READY TRIG D SET TO 50 Trigger Menu button ACQUISIXON wens BRE CBee HORIZONTAL TAGGER STOP MENU VEW q POSITION gt LEVEL 9 amp RESOLUTION READY E SET INCREASE DETAIL 1050 2 See page 3 167 for information on online help 3 49 Triggering To Use Gated Trigger Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to use the gated trigger Gated trigger
225. erture The mean of the histogram of the data distribution between the peaks adjusted by subtracting the zero level histogram yields the Suppressed level an High RZ Suppression Ratio Suppress Low Where m High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels m Suppress is the mean of the histogram of the data within an Eye Aperture in the suppressed region The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 The region used for sampling the suppressed region is equal to the Eye Aperture and has no independent control See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition RZ Suppression Ra
226. es Access the 1 Select the File menu from the application menu bar m Printer Print dnog then ioe ies in ve menu E O ER pe BST Click the Print to File box in the Print dialog box and Status Default printer Ready click OK Type QMS 2425 Print System Where TEKADM1542582c Comment QMS 2425 Print System B59 L2 Grd K14 Vv Print range r Copies Is All Number of copies f1 f Pages om K A y Pages from i lael T Collate Selection ie Cancel Select format 3 In the Print to File dialog box navigate to the folder EN HE and save you want Then type a name for your file in the File E S Imaces amp al l name box In the Save as type menu click the down arrow and select a file image format from the drop down menu Click Save to place the instrument screen in the file and image format that you selected file name Access to virtual keyboard Tip Access the printer instructions or the Windows pines y Help system if you require more information on PE TER printing Save as type PNG Files png x Cancel Bnin Hep JPEG Files jpo A Select the image format End of Procedure 3 136 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output To Ifthe display screen printouts have missing information such as blacked out Set High Color readouts your instrument may need to be set to a higher color setting To do so follow the steps below Ove
227. es 1 Edaes Tip Values are entered as a of the waveform displayed from left to right If no keyboard is installed access the virtual keyboard and use the touch screen to enter values CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 83 Measuring Waveforms To gate a measurement cont Gate G1 Gate G2 Overview Related control elements and resources End of Procedure 3 84 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Taking Cursor Measurements Why Use Use cursors to measure amplitude and time quickly and with more accuracy than when using graticule measurements Because you position cursors wherever you want on the waveform they are easier to localize to a waveform segment or feature than automatic measurements What s Measured Time or amplitude or both Vertical cursors measure time or bits on screen horizontal cursors measure amplitude voltage watts rho or ohms and waveform cursors measure both Table 3 6 expands on these definitions Table 3 6 Cursor functions types Cursor function Parameter measured Cursor readout Horizontal cursors measure amplitude volts watts Each cursor measures with respect to vi 201 9mV a i v2 101 6rm II m vi Level at Cursor 1 with respect to its source ground level Av o 303 5mY Horizontal cursors m v2 Level at Cursor 2 with respect to its source ground level m Av Level at Cursor 2 Level at Cursor 1 Level is cursor
228. es gh receitie heated eee SMreteeie e che ere ay ae arenes 3 142 To Mask Test a Waveform oree roenan cece eens 3 145 TOBE tay Mask ive eS arenes Melee E Oe rede Ba anand 3 149 Counting Masks ero esan e EAE AEE E one ete aly Pek AM eee 3 151 To Cr ate a New Mask cies Danity gee Beans Ok ee Pa weed 3 152 Taking Histo eras ers oo ease e heute e e RE hh aie alee ab O 3 154 Why Use ee rie tee aMreieiattts hegre ady saretiloria E EE 3 154 What s Special isis 9 sc EEE IEEE ake ete nly Bae EERS 3 154 What ssBxclided srsserp erau treta rer raaka AO aS 3 155 Keys to Using Histograms sensos oreca otaa En eee eee eee eens 3 155 To TVakeza Aistostam fares Daan yee E ee eae anaes 3 156 Histogram Statistics bs 5 uo esis ied Relea ie ee EEE E 3 158 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Table of Contents Using Waveform Databases cavai pesa e aa cee ccc eee eee ees 3 159 WY SE Aasscacachh tate E wie arg bein tye star 0o hate we cathe E whet Load 3 159 What s Special ii cca sarah oie aug gira Seetnte AE e el invade ied sare teeta ated 3 159 What StEXClIGGG 3 1 ce slra EEA wren ige wna Ob ellie EEEE Cel mt weal ee 3 159 Keys to USINO menos tra aE eaten ate deat O asive Avent Cor agave tener nnd 3 160 To Set Up a Waveform Database satori roa esr ere a cece eee eee 3 162 To Customize the Database Display 0 000000 0000 3 164 Accessing Online Help cc cece cece cece cere eee e enone 3 167 What s Available 35
229. ession You do so by applying numerical constants math operators and functions to operands which can be channel waveforms reference waveforms measure ments scalars or fixed scalars You can display and manipulate these derived math waveforms much like you can the channel and reference waveforms see Operations on Math Waveforms on page 3 107 Some examples of typical math waveforms follow Table 3 8 Math expressions and the To normalize a waveform Source waveform math waveforms produced Enter this math expression and get this math waveform Shifted and scaled to fit a std template Normalized math waveform C1 Meas1 Meas2 1 05V where 1 00V b 16v CHANI C1 is waveform shown left 0 95V 0 8V Meas1 Low of C1 0 05V simulate ac coupling and integrate Source waveform 0 00V Meas2 amplitude of C1 0 05V DC component removed before integration AC integration math waveform Intg C1 Meas1 0 V X 2 where 3V CHANI C1 is waveform shown left 1 0V Meas1 is set to take the Mean of C1 Sources Math Waveforms can incorporate the following sources Channel waveforms Reference waveforms Measurement scalars automated measurements that measure channel or reference waveforms in any time base Fixed scalars that you enter as numerical constants in expressions CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 103 Creating Math Waveforms
230. et the measurement system to use a waveform database if available NRZ Period is twice the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points It would be the period of a digital signal of a 0 1 0 1 stream NRZ Period 2 Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the two crossings of the eye diagram If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing cont Name NRZ Phase NRZ Pk Pk Jitter Definition Phase efoss of source2 Tcrossi of source 26 Tcross3 of source Tcross1 of source Where Tcross1 of source is the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 1 Tcross3 of source is the time of next crossing on source 1of the same polarity as Tcross1 Tcross1 of source is the time of the first crossing of either polarity on source 2 after Tcross1 of source1 All Tcrossings are at the mid reference level which is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the NRZ eye amplitude See NRZ Crossings on page B 64 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measure
231. evel and the NRZ bit time NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion as dive Ta Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive eye crossings and Trise and Tfall and the time points where the rising and falling edges cross the mid reference level See NRZ Crossings on page B 64 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the NRZ eye amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 The 30 guarded delta between two consecutive eye crossings Eye Width Tcross2 3 Teross20 Tcross1 3 Tcross1 o where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the two crossings This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 51 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing cont Name B 52 NRZ Fall Time NRZ Frequency NRZ Period Definition NRZ Fall Time characterizes the negative slope of the NRZ eye by computing the time interval
232. ew To use math waveforms cont Related control elements amp resources Take automatic _ Press the Vertical MATH button and use the VERTICAL measurements numbered front panel button to choose a math waveform from M1 M8 See right Select one of the signal types such as Pulse and then select a measurement category from the measurement bar C5 File Edt Vier Setup Utities Help Triggered 10 Histogram waveforms 151 x afs AR DE FL Trig Extemal Direct Ea fron BE soz 82 py 7 le eS LA a i it nr fie el CI LOmn fdliv 1C1 Rise 50 91ns Click a measurement button The instrument automatically takes the measurement on the waveform you selected in step 5 Read the results in the measurements readout Tip For more control of your measurement go to the Setup menu in the application menu bar and select Measurements Click the Help button in the Measurements Setup dialog box that displays for more information 3 110 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Overview To use math waveforms cont Take cursor Press the Vertical MATH button and use the measurements numbered front panel button to choose a math waveform from M1 M8 The button will light amber when you have chosen the waveform See figure at upper right Press the CURSORS button see figure at lower right Press Once to display vertical bar cursors shown below A second time to disp
233. f the Mag1 Perform Gated Trigger This test verifies that the Gated Trigger GT Option is functional This test is Test done using a front panel signal and a rear panel TTL connection Equipment required One 50 Q BNC cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1341 00 One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 00 One 50 Q terminator cap such as Tektronix part number 011 0049 02 One SMA 10X attenuator 20 dB attenuator SMA connector such as Tektronix part number 015 1003 00 One electrical 80E00 series sampling modules Prerequisites This test applies only to instruments that include option GT 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button and click Yes in the confirmation dialog box 2 Push the channel 3 button to select it The button lights and the channel display comes on See Figure 1 15 VERTICAL A POSITION VIEW Ke Channel gt lt buttons 3 ER 2 r K O T D m Figure 1 15 Channel button location 1 32 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection 3 Hook up the signal source Connect the SMA cable from the Internal Clock output through a 10x attenuator to 80E00 sampling module input channel 3 as shown in Figure 1 16 Connect BNC cable to External Gate input at rear panel kt aaa CSA8000 TDS8000 si TRIGGER GATE TTL SMA cable from INTERNAL CLOCK output to 80E00 C3 input
234. for instrument control However for some installations you might not have sufficient work space to install the mouse or keyboard For most operations you can use the touchscreen instead Table 3 4 lists some operations and the mouse touchscreen equivalents The instrument ships with two styluses Using a stylus can make it easier to perform touchscreen operations CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Table 3 4 Equivalent mouse and touchscreen operations Operations Select waveforms Push toolbar and dialog box buttons Display menus and select menu items Activate list boxes Position cursors on screen draw a zoom box Display a pop up menu for a channel or a readout Type a value in a list box Display a tool tip Display What s This Help Left click object on screen Touch object on screen Left click and drag Touch and drag Right click object Touch and hold don t move stylus Click the keyboard icon to pop up the Touch the keyboard icon to pop up the virtual keyboard click to type inthe value virtual keyboard touch to type in the value you want or use the peripheral keyboard if you want installed Rest pointer over UI button or label None Click the appropriate button see below Touch the appropriate button see below and then click a control in the UI application and then touch a control in the UI application X2 main screen button x main screen button ka dialog
235. for the channel under test shows a setting of 100 mV and a DC level is at about 2 divisions above center screen The front panel vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the DC level up and down the screen when rotated Return the DC level to 2 divisions above center screen before continuing Turning the vertical SCALE knob to 50 mV changes the amplitude of the DC level to about 4 divisions above center screen and returning the knob to 100 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 divisions above center screen Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes Push the front panel Acquisition MENU button to display the Acq setup dialog box Click each of the three acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is a small amount of noise present on the DC level Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the upper and lower extremes of the noise displayed Close Acquisition setup dialog box Push the Acquisition MENU button to close the Acq setup dialog box Verify the DC accuracy compensation Do the following substeps a Select Measurement from the Setup menu In the Meas Setup dialog box that displays m Select as Source the channel under test For example select Main C3 for channel 3
236. form database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Amplitude Table B 7 topic describes each NRZ measurement in the amplitude category See Table B 8 on page B 50 for timing category measurements see Table B 9 on page B 55 for area category measurements Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude Name Definition NRZ AC RMS The root mean square amplitude minus the DC component of the selected waveform within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this m
237. ger PRESCALE connectors on the front panel see Figure 3 13 m Signals connected to the PRESCALE connector are divided by eight and then fed to the trigger circuits m Signals connected to the DIRECT connector are fed directly to the trigger circuitry The signal is DC coupled and can be up to 3 0 GHz When using a given trigger source you should disconnect any other trigger source from the front panel to ensure specified performance Specifically m Do not connect a signal to the Trigger Direct or Trigger Prescale front panel connector unless you ve selected that input as the trigger source Do not connect a signal to the External 10 MHz Reference front panel connector unless you have selected that input as the timebase mode in the Horizontal setup dialog box Probe to Trigger Source Connection You can connect probes such as the P6207 and P6209 to the Trigger DIRECT input connector of the instrument Observe all static precautions outlined in the documentation for the probe you choose while following these steps m Connect the probe power connector to the TEKPROBE SMA compatible probe Level 1 or 2 only m Connect the probe signal connector probe must have an SMA connector to the Trigger DIRECT source input not the PRESCALE source input m Connect the probe input to the signal that is to supply the trigger source The probe you attach preconditions the trigger signal for its input just as other probes do for the vertic
238. h the clock recovery option or using the internal clock as when TDR testing Use triggering controls to control the acquisition window so that the instrument acquires the waveform data you want The trigger event when synchronized to the input signal defines the horizontal acquisition window By choosing the trigger event and adjusting the horizontal position delay between trigger event and the horizontal reference point you control the location in the data stream the input signal from which the waveform record is taken Clock Recovery If you use optical sampling modules that include a clock recov ery option you can use this recovered clock to trigger the instrument for specific DATA rates and formats that are compatible with the specific CR option in the optical module Also if you use optical sampling modules that support continuous rate clock recovery you can specify any custom clock recovery rate within the range supported by the module Refer to Sampling Modules Supported on page 1 4 to see those modules that support continuous rate clock recovery CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 39 Triggering 3 40 Keys to Using Gated Triggering For instruments equipped with Option GT the system allows triggering to be enabled and disabled gated based on a TTL signal at a rear panel input See To Use Gated Trigger on page 3 50 The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up to trigger on your wa
239. haracterized by each measurement the instrument lets you set the methods used independently for each measurement See High Low Tracking Method on page 3 77 and Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 See Statistics on Measurement Results To see how any automatic measurement varies statistically you can display a readout of the Min Max Mean and Standard Deviation the measurement results See step 6 on page 3 81 for instructions See also the following topic for information about questionable measurements CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 75 Measuring Waveforms 3 76 What s Excluded Keys to Using The following exclusions apply when using automatic measurements m More than eight measurements at one time are not allowed m Except for Average Optical Power all measurements of the category RZ or NRZ must be performed on a waveform database see Use Databases as Sources on page 3 75 The Average Optical Power measurement cannot use a waveform database as its source m The Average Optical Power measurement cannot display Annotations see page 3 74 and cannot use gates or user defined High Low methods see page 3 77 m Ifthe waveform parameter that is to be automatically measured cannot be acquired incorrect control setup out of range input signals this instrument displays the indicator For example if the instrument acquires less than a full waveform cycle it cannot measure frequency or period and displa
240. he Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ Overshoot The ratio of the maximum value of the measured signal to its amplitude expressed as a percentage The waveform is scanned for the maximum value within the measurement region while the amplitude is measured in the Eye Aperture Max High NRZ Overshoot 100 x High Low Where Max is the signal maximum and High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See NRZ Eye Aperture Parameters on page B 65 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Overshoo
241. he setup file To cancel setup without recalling a setup click the Cancel button Tip You can also recall the default setup from this dialog box clicking the Default button recalls the the factory default setup For more 8 For more help on recalling setups click the Help information button in the dialog box to display contextual help on screen End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a ProtoE vals01 A a ProtoE vals02 stp File name GByteEther stp Files of type Setup Files stp Cancel Access to virtual keyboard Comment Does mask test on StarComm proto a Hel Requires 1 electrical sampling module installed in C1 C2 See Test Spec StarComm_GByteMask Dele See page 3 167 to learn about using online help 3 119 Data Input and Output Saving and Recalling Waveforms Why Use What s Special What s Excluded 3 120 This instrument can save any number of waveforms limited only by the space you have to store them By saving a waveform you can recall it at a later time for comparison evalua tion and documentation This capability is helpful when you want to m recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other wave forms m extend the waveform carrying capacity of the instrument The instrument supports eight reference eight channel and eight math waveforms If you want more than eight references you can save the additional reference to
242. he waveform source The Clear Data button resets all mask counts In addition if the source for mask testing is a waveform database clicking this button clears the waveform database Tip Selecting a source that is currently displayed as a waveform database automatically enables mask testing on the database To mask test the waveform instead of its database uncheck the Use Wfm Database box Adjust the mask 6 You can use the color pulldown list to change the color Display of the selected masks on screen re Color nn You can add or subtract from the masks on screen Check On to turn on mask margins Adjust the Margin Mask Margins percentage box control to increase positive s or On Margin 0 0 aH decrease the masks on screen 3 146 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview Autoset the wave form to mask Set Stop Action amp 10 start testing To mask test a waveform cont Click the Autoset button to perform a manual autoset on the mask source waveform Tip You can choose to autoset the mask source waveform to the mask anytime you select a new mask standard just check Automatic option under Autoset Select the HiLow Method used to determine the High and Low values when aligning the input signal to the masks Mean sets the Mask Autoset to use the mean value of the High level topline and Low level baseline taken within the fixe
243. hese features see note can help stabilize triggering and perform special measurements m High Frequency Triggering When you enable the High Frequency triggering control the instrument increases trigger sensitivity of the trigger circuit by decreasing hysteresis a transition or noise band allowing triggering on higher frequency signals Metastability Reject When you enable Metastability Reject the instrument replaces the acquired sample with a null sample if it detects a potential metastable condition A metastable condition occurs when both the trigger input signal and the holdoff generated enable signal arrive at the internal trigger recognizer at virtually the same time Gated Triggering When you enable the Gated trigger control the trigger and the External Gate input are applied to the instrument through what is in effect an AND function Gated triggering is applied to acquire and to mask test or otherwise characterize signals like those found in extremely long transmission carriers such as undersea communication fibres Since long fibres are difficult to test user supplied test fixtures are used to repeat the test signal through a short loop of the cable to simulate traveling longer distances along its entire length The signal is picked off and connected to the instrument NOTE Gated trigger is available only when ordered as Option GT at the time the instrument ships Adjusting Holdoff Trigger holdoff can help stab
244. hin a repeating data frame See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 30 for more information on using FrameScan acquisitions CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 21 Acquiring Waveforms 3 22 What s Excluded Keys to Using Envelope acquisition mode can not be used with FrameScan acquisitions you must use Sample or Average modes The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the acquisition system so the waveforms acquired best fit your requirements Acquisition Modes Consider the mode you want to use to acquire data Sample the instrument does no post processing of acquired samples m Average the instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal Envelope the instrument retains the running minimum Min and maximum Max values in adjacent sample intervals continuously as subsequent waveforms are acquired creating an envelope of all waveforms acquired for that channel Acquiring and displaying a noisy square wave signal illustrates the difference between the three modes Note how Average reduces the noise while Envelope captures its extremes vn a PN a E fe bad Sample Average Envelope Acquisition Control Also consider how you want to control acquisition you have two main options either settable from the Acquisition Setup dialog box
245. hin an Eye Aperture in the suppressed region The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 The region used for sampling the suppressed region is equal to the Eye Aperture and has no independent control See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Return to Zero RZ Measurements Timing Table B 5 topic describes each RZ measurement in the timing category See Table B 4 on page B 15 for amplitude category measurements see Table B 6 on page B 36 for area category measurements Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing Name RZ Bit Rate RZ Bit Time Definition The inverse of the time interval between two consecutive rising or falling edges
246. his measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 Signal to Noise Ratio The ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise level The noise level is defined as one standard deviation of the waveform amplitude variance within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 7 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Pulse Measurements Timing Table B 2 describes each pulse measurement in the timing category See Table on B 1 on page B 2 for amplitude category measurements see Table B 3 on page B 14 for area category measurements Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing Name Burst width Cross Cross B 8 Definition The time between the first and last crossings either positive or negative of the waveform at the mid reference level in the measurement region See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help Also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If
247. i e the reciprocal of the Bit Time The crossing times are computed as the mean of the histogram of the data slice at the mid reference level The choice of rising or falling edge is automatic based on the first slope encountered in the measurement region 1 Tcross3 Tcross1 RZ Bit Rate Where Tcross3 and Tcross1 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive crossings on the same type slope at the mid reference level See RZ Crossings on page B 61 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 The time interval between two consecutive rising or falling edges The crossing times are computed as the mean of the histogram of the data slice at the mid reference level The choice of rising or falling edge is automatic based on the first slope encountered in the measurement region RZ Bit Time Tcross3 Tcross1 Where Tcross3 and Tcross1 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive crossings on the same type slope at the mid reference level
248. iew cont Related control elements and resources Set horizontal 3 Use the Horizontal knobs see right to achieve a good ACQUISITION display display of the waveform in the Mag time base f parameters Time base settings for Channel waveforms will be HORIZON TAE mT TRIGGER adjusted as you use the controls the controls will be inoperable if you have a reference or a math waveform Tew POSITION fy selected 4 Note that the Magi markers enclose a segment of Main RESOLUTION view that appears across the 10 division width of the C Mag view See below INCREASE CE q SCALE yS Portion magnified in the Mag1 time base view foo om i i i raze j g i gt Main Divider bar Je gt Mag CA u For more 4 Press the Horizontal Menu front panel button Click information the 2 icon in the the upper right corner of the Horiz Setup dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control See Accessing Online Help on page 3 167 for an overview of the online help system Click the Help button in the Horiz Setup dialog box to access a context sensitive overview on the horizontal controls and their set up End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 65 Displaying Waveforms Customizing the Display Why Use Use the display customizing features this instrument provides to present the display elements color graticule style waveform representation and so on
249. ified time elapses where Delay time Horizontal Pos Ch Deskew N sample intervals In the above calculation N Current sample count 1 For example if taking the 6t sample in the waveform record 5 sample intervals are added 5 The instrument takes one sample for each waveform record channel for each active on timebase This instrument sequentially samples one sample is taken per trigger for each active channel in each displayed timebase 6 If averaging or enveloping is on each record becomes part of a multi acquisition record that these modes produce see page 3 22 The process loops back to step 3 above to acquire additional records until the number of acquisitions required for the acquisition mode currently set are processed and then processing continues as for step 8 below 7 If FrameScan mode is on the acquisition process is modified See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 30 for information on how FrameScan works 8 At this point the acquisition record is in channel acquisition memory and is available to the instrument for measurement of its parameters display output and so on The instrument then checks for user specified stop condition and either returns to its idle state or continues at step 3 according to what it finds CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual SSS Ee User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Menu Bar Access to data I O printing online help system and set up functions
250. iles The Save and Recall Setup dialog boxes include the Virtual Keyboard button shown left When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the setup path name setup file name and comment The instrument excludes the following items when saving setups m Waveforms in channels C1 C8 or references R1 R8 Control settings scale position and so on are saved but not the waveform data Upon recall of the setup the settings are applied but the data is not restored m Waveforms in Math Waveforms M1 M8 Control settings and the math expression are retained but not the waveform data Upon setup recall the recalled math waveform expressions will be applied but there is no math waveform data to restore Instead a new math waveform will be generated based on the recalled expression User Options that are stored in the Windows Registry These include all options accessed by first selecting Utilities menu bar and then User Preferences Utilities menu m Standard Masks Standard masks are not stored with the setups However if your recalled setup includes display of a mask recalling the setup will in turn display the mask Also masks you define are stored with the setups The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the saving and recalling of setups All Settings are Retained The instrument includes
251. ilize triggering When you adjust holdoff the instrument changes the time it waits before rearming its trigger circuit after acquiring a sample Before rearming trigger circuitry cannot CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 45 Triggering recognize when the next trigger conditions are satisfied and cannot generate the next trigger event When instrument is triggering on undesired events Figure 3 14 top waveform you adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff UL Indicates trigger points Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Trigger level TH i i i At the longer holdoff time for the top waveform triggering occurs at valid but undesired trigger events With a shorter holdoff set for the bottom waveform triggers all occur on the first pulse in the burst which results in a stable display Figure 3 14 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Usable Holdoff The holdoff time the instrument can use varies within limits The maximum holdoff the instrument can achieve is the 50 ms specified in Specifica tion on page Table A 3 on page A 3 The minimum holdoff used depends on hardware constraints which do not change and certain control settings which you can control m The instrument hardware constrains the minimum usable holdoff time to the greater of the trigger to end of record time or 5 us m The trigger to end of record time EORT is the time from the trigger
252. ime readout t1 or t2 with respect to the time base of its source and At is calculated as t2 t1 automatically accounting for any difference in the time base of each cursor source NOTE If a cursor readout does not seem correct check the source of each cursor in the Cursor Setup dialog box Each cursor readout relates to the amplitude and time base settings of their source Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point Remember that each vertical cursor measures the time from the trigger source to itself This relationship is shown in Figure 3 23 on page 3 88 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 87 Measuring Waveforms 3 88 Horizontal Ref 0 First sampled point Trigger point of cursor source L IN v V X Cursor readout tn Time to first point Horizontal divs x sec div cisa Figure 3 23 Components determining Time cursor readout values Note that a vertical cursor readout t1 or t2 includes and varies directly with the time to first point component which varies directly with the horizontal position set for the time base used by the cursor source waveform To see the amount of time to the first point press Horizontal Menu on the front panel and set Horizontal Ref to 0 in the dialog box that displays Now the Horizontal position readout shows the time to first point and subtracting this value from the cursor readout yields the cursor position
253. ing inspection 1 17 Testing Waveforms masks histograms and waveform databases 3 141 Time base Glossary 9 view Glossary 10 Tool bar 2 7 Touch screen inoperable in Windows Safe mode 1 16 Touchscreen operations equivalent with mouse 3 60 Tracking Methods automatic measurement B 68 Trigger Glossary 9 clock recovery source 3 42 DIRECT connector 3 42 3 44 Edge Glossary 4 inputs 3 42 Level Glossary 9 level 3 40 modes 3 41 PRESCALE connector 3 42 3 44 probe used to connect 3 44 slope 3 40 sources 3 42 vs untriggered displays illustrated 3 41 Trigger inputs usage limitations 3 44 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 3 40 Trigger point defined 3 28 Trigger source usage limitations 3 44 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Index Triggering 3 39 3 104 3 112 based on application 3 43 edge 3 40 3 52 high frequency 3 45 holdoff 3 45 how to set 3 48 keys to using 3 40 metastability reject 3 45 overview of process 3 40 overview of 3 39 purpose 3 39 why use 3 39 U Update software 1 4 Upgrade firmware 1 4 URL Tektronix xiii Usable holdoff 3 46 User Interface Controls bar 2 7 map 2 7 Measurements bar 2 7 Menu bar 2 7 Readouts bar 2 7 readouts display 2 7 Status bar 2 7 Tool bar 2 7 Waveform bar 2 7 User Interface application software 1 3 User manual main 2 2 sampling modules 2 2 User Wavelength compensation how to perform 3 98 V Variable Pe
254. input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Select button A button that changes which of the two cursors is active Selected waveform The waveform which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments One of the channel selector buttons lights amber to indicate the currently selected waveform CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary Sequential equivalent time sampling A type of equivalent time sampling in which one sample is taken per acquisition with each sample skewed incrementally with respect to an external trigger event This instrument acquires using sequential equivalent time sampling Saved waveform A collection of sampled points that constitute a single waveform that is saved in any one on reference locations R1 R8 or to the file system Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horizontal quantity The two values are rising and falling Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform View The time base determines when and how long to acquire record points Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion of the waveform as specified by the time base Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cr
255. ion Horizontal delay Figure 3 9 The waveform record and its defining parameters As Figure 3 9 shows the instrument acquires points in order from left to right with each point from a separate trigger event and delayed from that event by horizontal delay sample interval x sample number 1 When all the points in the waveform record have been sampled and digitized the waveform record is in acquisition memory and becomes available for display or use in math waveforms storing exporting and elsewhere See Acquisition Cycle which follows For a control oriented discussion of the waveform record see m Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 17 m Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution on page 3 19 Acquisition Cycle The process of building a record is a subpart the acquisition cycle which describes how the instrument cycles through recognizing a trigger taking a sample and processing it according to sample mode and adding it to a waveform record This manual describes the normal acquisition cycle in Process Overview Map on page 2 6 Note the following points regarding acquisition cycles A waveform record exists either on display or as an icon on the waveform bar until it is replaced by a more recent acquisition or until you clear the record The process of clearing waveform records is described on page 3 26 m Choose the FrameScan cycle when you want to tes
256. ise levels are characterized by ohigh and olow the standard deviations from the mean for the High and Low levels High ohigh Low olow High Low Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels and ohigh and olow are the standard deviations See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 RZ Eye Opening Factor The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RZ Gain RZ Gain is a defined as the amplitude gain between two waveforms The measurement returns the ratio between the amplitudes measured within the Eye Aperture of each of the waveforms Ampl2 Ampl1 Where Ampli and Ampl2 are the amplitudes of the two source waveforms RZ Gain
257. isplay the Mask Edit dialog box He Ee HE Edit dialog box aa wim Database Hist Cursor Meas Note The Mask Setup dialog box and Mask Edit dialog d Hoz Acq Trig box are both within the Mask tab Use the Edit Mask ae cn p and End Mask Edit buttons to toggle back and forth between the two Mask dialog boxes 4 Vettices Mask 3 4 Vertices Mask 4 Not Defined Mask 5 Not Defined Mask 6 Not Defined Mask Not Defined Mask 8 Not Defined Vertex Number 1 a Horizontal Verlical 16 08n aH 500 0m aH Add Delete End Mask Edit Help CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 149 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview Add edit or delete 5 3 150 Selecta 4 Select a mask to edit from the Mask list This section of mask to edit mask vertices To edit a mask cont the Mask Edit dialog box lists all masks available for edit and the number of vertices each mask has Once you have selected a mask use the Vertex section of the Mask Edit dialog to add edit or delete individual vertices Use the Vertex Number box to select a vertex number for the selected mask Use the Horizontal and Vertical box controls to set the horizontal and vertical positions of the selected vertex Tip You may also drag and drop vertices directly on the mask to new locations Click on the mask on the graticule to select it Vertices are designated with an X Click Add to ad
258. iza tion is lost See Figure 3 12 Automatic trigger mode If you do not apply a signal to any channel displayed a baseline is displayed for that channel Triggered waveform Untriggered waveforms ovate agen rgzaneraggannagas Normal trigger mode Automatic trigger mode Figure 3 12 Triggered versus untriggered displays CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 41 Triggering Trigger Sources The trigger source provides the signal that the trigger system monitors The source can be m the internal clock of the instrument TDR clock rate with user selectable clock frequencies The Internal Clock Out connector supplies a replica of the internal clock at the instrument front panel See Figure 3 13 on page 3 42 m an external signal coupled to one of the trigger input connectors see Figure 3 13 on the front panel m External Direct DC coupled and usable with signals up to at least 3 0 GHz m External Prescale divided by 8 and usable with signals up to at least 12 5 GHz NOTE The upper limit is determined by signal input level this is enhanced by the optional accessory 80A01 m an internal clock recovery trigger provided by an optical sampling module equipped with a clock recovery option Clock recovery is user selectable for triggering rates that depend on the sampling module used for example either 622 Mbps OC 12 STM 4 standards or 2 488 Gbps OC 48 STM 16 standards for the 80C01 CR Optical Sampling Module
259. justable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width The High or Low selection for Noise At control in the Measurement Setup dialog instructs the measurement to be performed on the logical 1 or 0 levels If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 25 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Suppression Ratio Definition The ratio of the average power level of the logic High to the Suppressed level measured between two consecutive RZ pulses The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High is determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper half of the pulse The same region is sampled to record the data distribution in the lower half of the pulse data corresponding to the logical level 0 Similarly data is sampled in an equivalent sized region placed at one half bit interval offset from the Eye Ap
260. king this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 39 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name B 40 NRZ Extinction Ratio NRZ Extinction Ratio Definition The ratio of the average power levels of the logic 1 level High to the logic 0 level Low of an optical NRZ signal All level determinations are made within the NRZ Eye Aperture NRZ ExtRatio 100 x iow High Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The ratio of the average power levels of the logic 0 level Low to the logic 1 lev
261. l waveform database When one is specified the instrument acquires or computes the targeted measurement source then accumulates it into in the waveform database and then takes the measurement on the database data When you select the RZ or NRZ signal type the instrument attempts to automatically allocate one of the four waveform databases it provides to your measurement source B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a ET Glossary Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Active cursor The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob It is represented in the display by a solid line Active or Selected view The view in multiple view displays that is currently targeted for adjustment by the horizontal controls The front panel button of the active view is always lit amber Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when a sampling instrument digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on screen may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Annotations Lines displayed on scree
262. l I O Map OE a Ne ne Te CORO eT Rear Panel I O Map ccc cece cece c ccc e eee e eee eeeeees OVERVIEW ec ckhceske bea Cee Eee Nee ow Se eA esi es ESS Acquiring Waveforms 0 cece cece cece cece cece eee eeee Signal Connection and Scaling 0 eee Truto tikt eee eee W USE ite teeta eens Reet Mecha Ot ania ee O eS WhatS SpeCial E E serene ta gren ys er E ake gre ly E E What s Excluded agosa nonne Deut wet Pewee Ot E EEEO S KE VSO USING naga ia E E cha arene EE RE py abe Dea EE To Sei Up the Signal Input soros 24 creas oa beeen oe reas IEN S To Autoset the Instrument oere erT e ee eee eee eee eee ee To Reset the Instrume nt i o goti nme es EE da nde ae aon raed Signal Conditioning Background 0 00 0 cece eee eee Setting Acquisition Controls 2 0 0 0 cee eee eee Why iets aati Pau detente E E eet E E Meare miele T What S opeCial 205 o 28 serciceee s TEETE EASES What s Excluded sesser Orare EEEE EEEE ny bes EERS KG VSO USINO Anie loess aer E A o E e E pit a OEA OE aniya To Set Acquisition Modes s eror orena retake EEE E To Start and Stop Acquisition 0 0 0 t disn EEE eee eee Acquisition Control Background 0 0 0 0c cece cece eee ACQUISILION Hardware sere ersi tirad pateko SERERE Sampling Proces ee pes Er OTAI LEE kb ere dy aa E Sampling Modes sorsia noora he gets EET EE EEEIEE Waveform Record orase EEOSE EEEE EE EEEE grasped ACQUISILION Eye erse rororo er Te
263. l Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition RZ Max The maximum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RZ Mean The arithmetic mean of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measu
264. l as waveform databases You may set the source of each cursor explicitly in the Cursor Setup dialog box The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up cursors to obtain best measurement results Cursor Types The three cursor types are described in Table 3 6 on page 3 85 There are two cursors displayed for all types Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 the cursor currently selected for adjustment is the solid cursor bottom cursor in Fig ure 3 22 E 100 0mV div Jet 20 00mY div a Cursors Mn C3 7 v1 300 0m v2 6043m acid Av 239 6mv Figure 3 22 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes Cursors are Display Limited You cannot move a cursor off screen Also if you resize waveforms the cursors do not track That is a cursor stays at its screen position ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position and to vertical offset However waveform cursors track the waveform point vertically they work differently than vertical and horizontal cursors Cursors Default to the Selected Waveform Each cursor measures its source defined in the Cursors Setup dialog box Note the following behavior regarding source selection m When cursors are first turned on the instrument automatically assigns them to use the waveform currently selected on screen as the source for each CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms cursor Up to the time you turn cursors on you can select a wav
265. l button Tip If you want to acquire one and only one more ACQUISITION waveform after the Stop After condition occurs push the RUN STOP front panel button instead of CLEAR DATA End of Procedure 3 148 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Edit a Mask When you edit a mask in an existing communications standard the mask type switches from the selected standard to type User and uses the masks from the Standard as a basis for editing Use the procedure that follows Overview To edit a mask Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have at least one waveform turned on and the Mask Setup dialog box displayed See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 for information on displaying waveforms Select a mask 2 Next you need to select and enable a standard mask _ set To start with a standard mask pull down the R Comm Standard Nong gt Comm Standard list and choose a standard mask To diow m A 0C 1 STM 0 by sss T Use Wm Database Clear Data OC 3 STM 1 create a mask from scratch or edit an existing T 2 Fpa erra ecne CUCS a user defined mask select User in the Comm Standard CMe co OR cae selection list e _ _ Con Magnjo BE 0C 36 OC 48 STM 16 FEC2 666 Gb s Autoset OC 192 STM 64 HiLow Method FECI0 66 Gb s art FEC43 02 Gb s Open Mask 3 Click Mask Edit to d
266. lates to the instrument operating interfaces and features see Documentation Map on page 2 2 Conventions This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisi tion window throughout this section and elsewhere These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the acquisition window which defines the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any operating system windows that you might display on screen xii CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Preface Contacting Tektronix Phone Address Web site Sales support Service support Technical support 1 800 833 9200 Tektronix Inc Department or name if known 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA www tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 1 1 800 833 9200 select option 2 Email techsupport tektronix com 1 800 833 9200 select option 3 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time This phone number is toll free in North America After office hours please leave a voice mail message Outside North America contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor see the Tektronix web site for a list of offices CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual xiii Preface xiv CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual EEE y Product Description Models Key Features This chapter describes your instrument which is either the CSA8000B Commu nicatio
267. lay horizontal bar cursors A third time to display waveform based cursors Press the SELECT button to toggle selection between the two cursors 12 Turn the knob to position each cursor on the math waveform to measure the feature that interests you File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered 0 Histogram Waveforms ZEII ER AA so LE TriglExternal Direct E fou ae o k Pulse Amplitude anfon cn r na anr M Ea Ea LOBAR Hi El EME we S v2 Av ti t2 t 13 Read the results in cursor readout Liat 1 094MHz C1 100m idiv Mi Fniv div yl 2 274 I 2 284 9 916mv 530 5ns 1 059us S28ns In the figure shown above waveform cursors are used to measure the V of the integral math waveform which could be used to compute its area f vdt End of Procedure Related control elements amp resources os VERTICAL DEFAULT OEN CURSORS ey a ACQUISITION For more information on taking automatic and cursor measurements of wave forms see Measuring Waveforms on page 3 73 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 111 Creating Math Waveforms 3 112 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a ET Data Input and Output This section describes the input and output capabilities of your instrument Specifically it covers m Saving and Recalling Setups on page 3 113 m Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 120 m Exporting Waveforms and Histograms on page 3 12
268. layed both live and derived waveforms math and reference waveforms The following sections cover display related usage m Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 m Creating Math Waveforms on page 3 101 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 3 Acquiring Waveforms Signal Connection and Scaling 3 4 Why Use This section presents an overview of the instrument features related to setting up the input signal for digitizing and acquisition It addresses the following topics m Where to find information for installing sampling modules and connecting input signals m How to turn on channels and adjust their vertical scale position and offset m How to set the horizontal scale position and record length of the Main time base View NOTE Terminology This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisition window These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the acquisition window which defines the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any windows or display windows on screen See Conventions on page Xii Vertical Vertical Vertical offset position scale YO OY amp YO Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal scale position record length Sampling module Figure 3 1 Acquisition and display controls Use signal conditioning and scaling controls to ensure the instrument acquires the data that
269. led with mask testing provides the tool you need to capture a defective bit and examine the pattern leading up to it Overview To catch a bit error Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument should be set up per the previous procedure Pause the acquisition system push the Run Stop button on the front panel m See To Acquire in FrameScan Mode Infinite persistence and color grading display modes page 3 33 should be off if turned on in the previous procedure Enable 4 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utiities Help Triggered mask testing select Mask See right Vertical Horizontal Use the Mask Setup dialog box to set up for mask eae testing as you would for nonFrameScan acquisitions Trigger See Using Mask Testing on page 3 141 for information Measurement about using Mask testing Be sure to enable the mask ispla Tip If you selected a communication standard when you Histogram set the FrameScan bit rate see step 8 on page 3 34 Gey the same standard will be preselected in the Mask z TDR Setup dialog box 3 36 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To catch a bit error cont Control elements and resources Set conditional 6 From the application menu bar select Setup and then r Stop After acquisition and select Acquire Run Stop Button Only start testin ee ck 9 7 Inthe Acq Setup dialog box see right che
270. lock recovery 3 39 trigger source 3 42 Communication remote 3 139 Compensation 3 92 3 100 how to perform 3 92 when installing moving sampling modules 1 10 Configuration instrument 1 9 maximum channels available 1 11 software installation 1 15 Connectors DIRECT 3 42 3 44 locations and purpose 1 12 PRESCALE 3 42 3 44 Contacting Tektronix xiii Index 2 Controls initialize Glossary 6 knob Glossary 6 selected waveform 3 7 Controls bar 2 7 Coupling Glossary 3 CSA8000 description 1 1 Cursor measurements 3 85 3 87 Cursor Measurements how to set sources for 3 90 Cursor measurements how to take 3 89 sources 3 86 what s measured 3 85 why use 3 85 Cursors 3 85 Glossary 3 constrained by the display 3 86 default measurement source 3 86 horizontal bars Glossary 5 measure horizontally from the trigger point 3 87 types 3 86 units and readout names 3 88 use with independent sources 3 87 vertical bars Glossary 9 waveform Glossary 10 what time cursors measure illustration 3 88 D Dark Level compensation how to perform 3 98 Data controlling input and output 3 113 Data Input and Output 3 113 Database waveform Glossary 10 Databases Waveform 3 159 Delay time Glossary 3 horizontal Glossary 5 Description key features 1 1 product 1 1 Deskew Glossary 2 how to 3 96 Diagnostics procedure 1 18 system 1 16 Digitizing Glossary 3 process defined 3 27 3 29 Displ
271. lse The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 13 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Pulse Measurement Area Table B 3 describes each pulse measurement in the area category See Table B 1 on page B 2 amplitude category measurements see Table B 2 on page B 8 for timing category measurements Table B 3 Pulse Measurements Area Name Area Cycle Area Definition The area under the curve for the waveform within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative Area waveform t dt over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 For best results optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The area under the curve for the first waveform period within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative Area revert dt over the first waveform period within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 an
272. m Fibre Channel Infiniband and Gigabit Ethernet optical communication standards powerful built in measurement capability including histograms mask testing and automatic measurements automatic measurements operate on Pulses RZ eye patterns and NRZ eye patterns DC to 65 GHz optical bandwidth DC to 65 GHz electrical bandwidth with up to 12 5 GHz triggering NOTE Bandwidth is determined by the specific modules that are installed FrameScan acquisition for isolating data dependent failures during confor mance performance testing and for examining very low level repetitive signals support for optical conformance testing of SONET SDH signals including the various forward error correction rates for these telecom rates from 155 Mbps to 43 Gb s 1 and 10 Gb s FibreChannel signals 10 52 Gb s CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Product Description FibreChannel signals and 1 2 and 10 Gigabit FibreChannel signals as well as 2 5 Gb s Infiniband signals NOTE Support for conformance testing rates is determined by the specific modules that are installed m high precision time base with two modes of operation locked and short term jitter optimized m negligible long term jitter degradation lt 0 1 ppm which substantially improves the ability to view signals that are delayed far from the trigger point without distortion m improved short term and long term trigger jitter m a gated trigger option O
273. m Description Monitor If you use a non standard monitor you may need to change the the Windows display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your monitor Printer Connect the printer to the EPP enhanced parallel port connector directly If your printer has a DB 25 connector use the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the EPP connector For information on printer usage see Printing Waveforms on page 3 126 Other Refer to the Application release notes on your System Rebuild CD for possible additional accessory installation information not covered in this manual Power On the Instrument Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time 1 Check that the line fuses are correct for your application Both fuses must be the same rating and type Fuse types require a unique cap and fuseholder See Table 1 2 and Figure 1 4 Table 1 2 Line fuses Cap amp fuseholder Fuse type Fuse part number part number 0 25 x 1 250 inch 8 A fast blow 250 V 159 0046 00 200 2264 00 5x20 mm 6 3 A fast blow 250 V 159 0381 00 200 2265 00 Ty Power switch Fuses AC power Figure 1 4 Line fuse and power cord connector locations rear panel CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 13 Installation CAUTION Connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying power to the product Connecting the accessories after powering on the instrument can damage the
274. m that supports your data analysis task For example you can define a math waveform that combines waveforms mathematically x You can also integrate a single waveform into an integral math waveform as is shown below Source waveform T Math waveform Defining Math Waveforms This instrument supports mathematical combination and functional transforma tions of waveforms that it acquires Figure 3 24 shows this concept Channel waveform Math expression Math waveform C2 function source M1 Diff C2 Figure 3 24 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 101 Creating Math Waveforms Why Use What s Special What s Excluded 3 102 Create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms you can derive the data view that your application requires You can create math waveforms that result from m mathematical operations on one or several waveforms or measurements add subtract multiply and divide m function transforms of waveforms such as integrating differentiating and so on You can create up to eight math waveforms see Keys to Using on page 3 103 for more examples Some features of note follow Functions Powerful functions such as integrate differentiate average can be taken on single waveforms or mo
275. ment provides for determining these levels m Mode of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Mode is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 20 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 77 Measuring Waveforms 3 78 High min max High mean High mode Mid reference Low mode Low mean Low min max Figure 3 20 High Low tracking methods Mean of Histogram sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the mean or average value derived using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level This setting is best for examining eye patterns and optical signals See Figure 3 20 Min max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 20 Auto switches between methods Auto method first attempts to calculate the high and low values using the Mode method Then if the histogram does not show obvious consistent high and low levels Auto method automatic
276. ment region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 The delta between the minimum and maximum of time crossings with the mean of the histogram being Tcross Pk PK Jitter Tcrosspp The Jitter At control in the Measurement Setup dialog specifies whether the jitter is to be measured at the eye cross or at the mid reference level See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the eye amplitude If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 53 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing cont Name NRZ Rise Time NRZ RMS Jitter Definition Computes the time interval between the mean crossings of the low reference level and the high reference level to characterize the positive slope of the eye NRZ Rise Time TcrossH HcrossL Where TcrossH is the
277. ments Timing cont Name RZ Pulse Symmetry RZ Rise Time Definition RZ Pulse Symmetry measures to what extent the RZ pulse is symmetrical around the peak at the mid reference level The pulse peak is the center of the interval sized to Eye Aperture which yields the maximum mean vertical value See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on page B 62 TcrossO Tcross1 RZ Pulse Symmetry 100 x ieee Tcross1 Where m Tcross1 and Tcross2RZFig CrossLevels gt Second are the time crossings of the RZ pulse of the mid reference level See RZ Crossings on page B 61 Tcross0 is the time coordinate of the pulse peak The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 If gating is enabled the measurement region is constrained between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 RZ Rise Time characterizes the positive slope of the RZ pulse by computing the time interval between the mean crossings of the low reference level and the high reference level RZ Rise Time TcrossH HcrossL Where m TcrossH is the mean of the histogram of the crossing of the high reference level
278. ments use the entire portion of the waveform that the vertical window captures not only the portion displayed on screen Also waveforms exported or saved from the File menu or over the GPIB contain data from the entire vertical window not just the on screen portion Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations You define the horizontal acquisition window that is you set several parameters that determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record when acquired For background please read Waveform Record on page 3 28 These common parameters specify a common horizontal acquisition window that is CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 17 Acquiring Waveforms applied to all channels in parallel See Independent vs Shared Window on page 3 20 These parameters are m The external trigger signal that you input and set the trigger system to recognize determines the point relative to the input waveform that triggers the instrument m The horizontal position you set determines the horizontal delay from the trigger point to the first sample point in the acquisition window m The horizontal scale you set and the requirement that all waveforms fit within the 10 horizontal division display determines the horizontal duration of the window relative to any waveform allowing you to scale it to contain a waveform edge a cycle or several cycles Horizontal position Sample interval First sa
279. module has been superseded by the 80C11 m 80C05 9 953 Gb s 20 30 40 GHz optical module for 10 40 Gb s NRZ This module has been superseded by the 80C10 m 80C06 55 GHz optical module for 40 Gb s RZ and NRZ telecom This module has been superseded by the 80C10 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Product Description m 80C07 155 622 2488 Mb s amplified optical module Clock Recovery for all rates added with option CR1 This module has been superseded by the 80C07B m 80C07B 155 622 1063 1250 2125 2488 2500 Mb s amplified optical module The module is limited to five receivers configured at the time of order Clock Recovery for all rates plus 2666 Mb s added with option CR1 m 80C08 9 953 10 31 Gb s Multi rate amplified optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 and 10 3125 Gb s added with option CR1 This module has been superseded by the 80C08C m 80CO08B 9 953 10 31 10 52 Gb s Multi rate amplified optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 and 10 3125 Gb s added with option CR1 FibreChannel Clock Recovery 10 3125 and 10 51875 Gb s added with option CR2 This module has been superseded by the 80C08C m 80C08C 9 953 10 31 10 52 11 10 Gb s Multi rate amplified optical module Clock Recovery 9 953 and 10 3125 Gb s added with option CR1 Clock Recovery 10 3125 and 10 51875 Gb s added with option CR2 Continuous rate clock recovery added with CR4 m 80C09 9 953 10 71 Gb s Multi rate optical module Clock
280. mpled and digitized point Trigger event on Ext trigger signal Horizontal lt Horizontal acquisition delay window Time of first point Figure 3 4 Horizontal acquisition window definition m The record length along with the horizontal scale you set for the 10 divi sion window determines the sample interval horizontal point spacing or resolution on the waveform NOTE The horizontal position controls the distance to the Horizontal Reference to indirectly set the time to the first sampled point See Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 59 for a discussion of this relationship 3 18 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution These parameters all relate to each other and specify the horizontal acquisition window Because the horizontal acquisition window must fit in the 10 horizontal division display for most cases you just set the duration of the horizontal acquisition window 10 divs x the scale setting as described in 1 below By also setting a record length in samples you indirectly set the resolution sample interval sample rate for the horizontal acquisition window waveform record The relationships between these horizontal elements follow 1 Time Duration seconds 10 divs window size x Horizontal Scale sec div 2 Time Duration seconds Sample Interval s
281. mpts to calculate the high and low values using the Mode method Then if the histogram does not show obvious consistent high and low levels Auto method automatically switches to the Min Max or Mean method For example the Mode histogram operating on a triangle wave would not find consistent high and low levels so the instrument would switch to the Min Max mode Consistent high and low levels would be found on a square wave so the Auto mode would use the Mode method The mid reference level adjustable from the Meas Setup dialog box defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude If measurement gates are enabled the measurement region is the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first rising edge but the direction can be reversed from Meas Setup dialog box so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 To Optimize the Vertical Resolution Optimizing vertical resolution improves the result this measurement produces Try these methods m Execute Autoset push AUTOSET on the front panel m Adjust vertical scale or increase input amplitude to increase the overall vertical size of the waveform while keeping the waveform on screen CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 69 Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods Use a Waveform Database This measurement needs to be performed using a statistica
282. ms on page 3 105 Select and dis 2 Press the Vertical MATH button The button of the es VERTICAL play currently displayed and selected math waveform will light amber the buttons of all other currently displayed math waveforms will light green Math waveforms not LJ displayed remain unlighted in Press any waveform button to make it the selected waveform If the waveform was not displayed Ae operation is as follows m f the waveform you select is defined it displays otherwise eJ the Define Math dialog box displays so that you B can define and turn on the waveform you just C8 selected See To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 105 for a procedure for doing so Tip You can also click the math waveform in the display or its icon at the left of the display to select it Set scale and 4 Use the Vertical Scale and Position knobs to size and VERTICAL position position the waveform on the screen Tip You can t adjust the offset of a math waveform However adjustments of offset settings in the source waveforms will reflect in the math waveform as ATOA determined by its expression z4 Tip You can t adjust horizontal scale position and sample density resolution of math waveforms If adjusting these settings affect sources for a math waveform the adjustment will be reflected in the math EUNE Vv waveform CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 109 Creating Math Waveforms Overvi
283. n beginning page A 8 Adjustable 5 us to 50 ms in 0 5 ns increments When External Prescaled Trigger mode is used holdoff period applies to the Prescaled input divided by 8 A 3 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 System Trigger cont Description External direct trigger capabilities and conditions External direct trigger input characteristics External direct trigger input range External direct trigger maximum operating trigger signal External direct trigger level range External direct trigger sensitivity External direct trigger sensitivity External direct trigger level resolution External direct trigger level accuracy External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode maximum External direct trigger delay jitter short term optimized mode typi cal y External direct delay jitter locked to internal 10 MHz refer ence mode maximum External direct delay jitter locked to inter nal 10 MHz reference mode typical External direct trigger minimum pulse width Characteristics Direct edge triggering on signal applied to dedicated front panel connector with Holdoff Level Adjust Auto Normal High Frequency On Off and Enhanced Triggering On Off controls External direct trigger specifications apply only under the condition that no other trigger signal is applied to respective connectors Short term optimized mode and locked to internal 10 MHz reference
284. n of parameters 3 19 position 3 7 scaling 3 4 set up procedure 3 8 time range acquisition window Glossary 5 Horizontal Reference usage limitations 3 31 Horizontal acquisition window Glossary 5 control set up 3 10 what determines 3 17 Horizontal delay defined 3 28 Horizontal position relative to Horizontal Ref 3 59 Horizontal reference relative to horizontal position 3 59 Horizontal reference point Glossary 5 Horizontal scale why use 3 4 Horizontal set up purpose 3 4 Horizontal settings with channel waveforms 3 58 with math waveforms 3 58 with reference waveforms 3 58 Image ink saver mode 3 134 Incoming inspection 1 17 perform compensation 1 20 perform diagnostics 1 18 perform hardware and operating system test 1 38 perform the functional tests 1 21 test equipment required by 1 17 Infinite Persistence display mode 3 67 Initialize Glossary 6 Ink saver mode 3 134 Input Output front panel map 2 11 Input Output rear panel map 2 12 Index 4 Inspection and cleaning exterior 3 175 flat panel display 3 176 Installation 1 9 environmental requirements 1 9 incoming inspection procedure 1 17 sampling modules 1 10 compensation requirements 1 10 software installation 1 15 Instrument accessories list 1 41 acquisition overview 2 6 cleaning 3 175 functional model 2 4 installation 1 9 key features 1 1 models 1 1 optional accessories list 1 42 options list 1 41
285. n page 3 53 for information on displaying waveforms Select and display 2 To create a mask from scratch select User in the Comm Source a user defined Standard selection list nage Main Cl F Enable Mask Counts Com None SONET SDH a m o Fiber Channel Optical Fiber Channel Electrical m Disp Ethemet m n Other 3 152 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To create a new mask cont Related control elements amp resources Create a 3 Click Mask Edit to display the Mask Edit dialog box we Setups HE new mask f f wm Database Hist Cursor Meas In Mask list select the user defined mask you wish to va d al ir asi isp edit Use the Vertex controls to add position and delete vertices on your new mask You may also drag and drop vertices directly on the graticule display 4 Yertices Mask 3 4 Vertices Mask 4 Not Defined Mask 5 Not Defined Mask 6 Not Defined Mask Not Defined p ai Mask 8 Not Defined Click End Mask Edit when you are finished creating your mask to apply all additions changes and return to the Mask Setup dialog box gt Vertex Read Helpful Hints immediately following this BENE Ge Ee procedure for more information on creating masks fis cen BES 500 0m Bey fad _Delte End Mask Edit Help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 153
286. n to indicate measurement reference levels and points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement value Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe or an external attenuator That is the ratio of the input measure to the output measure For example a 10X attenuator will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10 Automatic measurement An automatic measurement of a parameter and its numeric readout that the instrument takes and updates directly from a channel math or reference waveform in real time without operator intervention Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the instrument to automatically acquire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Autoset A function of the instrument that attempts to automatically produce a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up the acquisition controls based on the characteristics of the selected waveform A successful autoset will produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the instrument displays and updates a waveform that is the averaged result of several waveform acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparent noise The instrument acquires data as in sample mode and then averages it a user specified number of
287. n to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 8 NRZ Measurements Timing cont Name NRZ Delay NRZ Duty Cycle Distortion NRZ Eye Width Definition The time interval between the crossings of the mid reference levels on the two sources of the measurement NRZ Delay Tcross source1 Tcross source2 Where Tcross is the positive or negative crossing time at mid reference level The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the NRZ eye amplitude See NRZ Crossings on page B 64 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 By default for each source the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available The ratio of the time interval between the points where the rising and the falling edges cross the mid reference l
288. nd Low are the 100 and 0 reference levels If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement The ratio of the minimum waveform value to the signal amplitude over the measurement region expressed as a percentage Overshoot 100 x teh Le Where Minis the signal minimum m High and Low are the 100 and 0 signal reference levels If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition Peak to Peak Noise The maximum range of the waveform amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database
289. ndows like those shown in Figure 3 2 a and b on page 3 15 because neither waveform is clipped that is both waveforms are acquired But if the signal amplitude were to extend outside the vertical acquisition window the data acquired becomes clipped Clipped data causes inaccurate results if used in amplitude related automatic measure ments Clipping also causes inaccurate amplitude values in waveforms that are stored or exported for use in other programs m The vertical position adjusts the display of the graticule relative to the vertical acquisition window position is a display control Figure 3 2 b shows how vertical position moves the waveform graticule vertically in the vertical acquisition window to place the acquired waveform in the graticule display Position does not determine what data is acquired as does vertical offset The vertical offset control affects the vertical acquisition window and the displayed waveform as follows m The vertical range window is always centered around the offset value that is set Vertical offset is the voltage level at middle of the vertical acquisition window With no zero offset see Figure 3 3 that voltage level is zero ground m As you vary vertical offset the middle voltage level moves relative to zero This moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually a l
290. ng NOTE New versions of the product and or demo application software may become available at our web sit See Contacting Tektronix on page xiii Remember to fill out and send in the customer registration card The registration card is packaged in an envelope in the shipping package CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 7 Check the Package Contents 1 8 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Installation This section covers installation of the instrument addressing the following topics m Check the Environment Requirements on page 1 9 m Install the Sampling Modules on page 1 10 m Connect the Peripherals on page 1 12 m Power On the Instrument on page 1 13 m Powering Off the Instrument on page 1 15 m Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Gamma on page 1 15 m Back Up User Files on page 1 15 The basic operating software is already installed on the hard disk If reinstalla tion of software becomes necessary see the following topic m Software Installation on page 1 15 Check the Environmental Requirements Site Considerations A Read this section before attempting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling at least two inches 5 1 cm of clearance is recommended on the rear and sides of the inst
291. ni e Run Stop Aca Mode Average E Trig sternal Direct p ov S 50 ej Puse Anpitude m anr nn tn m aa m AE Au r rer rer yA ee A re al aE gt T j Waveform C3 100 Omid R E Orr 2 H E a 9 938ns Copy Sell POA 2 139848 Send To Back i at 4040us tiht 247 SKH2 Yoke 4 J Sandi as Colon Grade i z Pe Propenties gt l i l eee eA i EEE I f ca ee eee cece a eee Mt 1 f i i are E ee i Sener eee a l nN bss 7 286 Sem 2 D00pa div fe c00use aH focus aH 4 50 PM 4 10 00 2 9 EE Display Map Multiple Views Drag the markers to enclose the portion of waveform to appear in Mag 2 View Drag the markers to enclose the portion of waveform to pi appear in Mag 1 View VEDEN File Edt View S tup Utilities Help Triggeted Wavefolns 0 E aM als Waveform C3 20 00m Woi MAIN View lt Drag the border between graticules to vertically size Main Mag1 and Mag2 Views Magi View lt Mag 23 View lt cs feo nomve aE pov aE main OQ A fioaonsea aH r38 0ns ae 1 27 PM 3 20 00 2 10 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual ay aT Front Panel I O Map Floppy disk drive accessible G Oa C j A from Windows 98 GOS A a A S020 0 ej oa TOST S e sO O Compartments for large S modules up to two channels gt owl INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT
292. not occur when the acquisition system is stopped 8 8 q y Ppp the data will not update on screen until acquisition is restarted CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 55 Displaying Waveforms Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up the instrument time base views so that they best support your data analysis tasks Waveform Display In general the method of displaying a waveform is to define the waveform and then turn it on Table 3 2 summarizes this process as it applies to the different waveforms Table 3 2 Defining and displaying waveforms Channel Ci C8 Install sampling modules in the instrument Push the Vertical CH button and then push one of compartments the numbered buttons 1 8 Reference R1 R8 Define an active reference waveform by Defining a reference waveform as is described at left turns on its display m saving a channel reference or math waveform to one of locations R1 R8 After a waveform is defined use the Vertical REF f F button with the waveform number buttons to turn the recalling a waveform previously saved to a file waveform on and off into one of locations R1 R8 Both of these operations can be performed from the File menu Math M1 M8 Define a math waveform using existing sources When defining a math waveform you turn it on in channel and reference waveforms and measure the Define Math dialog box ment scalar values
293. notations from the menu as shown at right To see statistics 6 Right click on any measurement readout to display its context menu Select Show Statistics to display measurement statistics in the measurement readout See What s Excluded on page 3 76 for information about the indicator CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 81 Measuring Waveforms Ove 3 82 rview To take automatic measurements cont To measure a 8 database From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Measurement See right In the Meas Setup dialog box make sure the measurement one of Meas1 through Meas8 is selected Inthe Source tab check the Use Wfm Database option For more in 11 formation as shown below Sourcel Source2 Setta Default Source Region HiLow RefLevel J Main C3 a I UsewimDatabase Clear Signal Type Pulse NAZ RZ fT Tip If at the time you first create a measurement the measurement source you select is displayed as a waveform database the database will automatically be measured Uncheck the User Wfm Database option if you want to measure the waveform instead of the database Press the Help button in the Meas Setup dialog box to access the online help See Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference on page B 1 for a list of the measurements and their definitions End of Procedure Related control elements and res
294. ns Signal Analyzer or the TDS8000B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope and its options Following this description are four sections m Check the Package Contents on page 1 7 shows you how to verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument m Installation on page 1 9 shows you how to configure and install the instrument as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the product m Incoming Inspection on page 1 17 provides a procedure for verifying basic operation and functionality m Accessories and Options on page 1 41 lists the instrument options available and the standard and optional accessories for this product This manual supports two very similar instruments m The CSA8000B Communications Signal Analyzer m The TDS8000B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope Differences between the two instruments will be called out when necessary otherwise the material applies to both instruments The word instrument refers to either product The instrument is a high speed precision sampling system that finds use in validation and conformance testing and impedance verification for m high performance semiconductor computer applications such as semicon ductor testing TDR characterization of circuit boards IC packages and cables and high speed serial digital data communications m high performance communications applications such as design evaluation and manufacturing test of datacom and telecom compon
295. ns on Math Waveforms Why Use What s Excluded This instrument supports many of the same operations that it provides for channel live and reference waveforms For example you can measure math waveforms with cursors This section introduces these operations m Vertical display scaling and positioning m Taking automatic measurements m Taking cursor measurements Use math waveform operation such as those listed above to enhance the displaying processing and analyzing of math waveforms For example in addition to the operations listed you can save math waveforms as references and make them the source of either of two onboard waveform data bases Some operations allowed on channel waveforms are not allowed on math waveforms m Independent horizontal scaling Each math waveform that you create derives its horizontal scale and position from the sources you include in its math expression Horizontal controls will not operate with math waveforms CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 107 Creating Math Waveforms 3 108 Keys to Using You can adjust these controls for the source waveforms and your adjustments will reflect in the math waveform as the sources update You can also magnify math waveforms using the Mag or Mag derived time bases m Independent vertical offset You cannot adjust the offset for a math wave form you can adjust the offset of channel waveforms used as sources to a math waveform m Explicit ga
296. nsate option button d From the top pulldown list choose All default selection to select the main instrument and all its modules as targets to compensate e Click the Execute button to begin the compensation f Follow the instructions to disconnect inputs and install terminations that will appear on screen be sure to follow static precautions see the user manual for your sampling module when following these instructions NOTE Failing to install the 50 Q terminations on electrical inputs can yield erroneous compensation failures or results 2 Verify that the compensation routines pass a The compensation may take several minutes to complete Verify that Pass appears as Status for the main instrument and for all sampling modules listed in the Compensation dialog box when compensation completes b If instead Fail appears as Status rerun the compensation If Fail status continues after rerunning compensation and you have allowed warm up to occur the module or main instrument may need service c If you want to save the compensation constants generated by this compensation click the Save option button under Select Action Click the Execute button to save the compensation 3 Close the compensation dialog box End of Procedure Perform the Functional Tests These procedures use the DC CALIBRATION OUTPUT and the INTERNAL CLOCK OUTPUT connectors to further verify that the instrument functions properly An SMA cable
297. nual 1 35 Incoming Inspection Untriggered signal indicator Not Trig d a eae pees Teom al ajal Aies Run Stop __ Trig EMELE Control gt lc 4 S0 00rmve as oov aH Main q aq 2 00000ps aE 19 000n aE 4 44 PM 9 10 01 bar Vertical scale Horizontal setting scale setting Figure 1 19 Signal not triggered no signal L Verify that the Gated Trigger function is enabled Disconnect 50 Q terminator cap from the end of the cable Verify signal is triggered gate enabled with waveform on screen See Figure 1 20 on page 1 37 1 36 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection Triggered signal indicator A File Edit View Setup Utilities Help Triggered Tektronk la x ajz AR nje Run Stop Acq Made Sample Trigfintenal Clock aA a I Pulse Amplitude nut nn ft AA TUL any 30 nn gt 0 lgi C3 50 00mVidiv Internal gt clock signal C 2 popsi Control Ea Fon BE feov a6 main QE poos BE 11 35 am 2 22 02 a Vertical scale setting Horizontal scale setting Figure 1 20 Signal triggered 12 Disconnect the test hook up End of Functional Test Procedures CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 37 Incoming Inspection Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests Windows 98 Only 1 38 QA Win32 A NOTE The procedures in this section only apply to instruments using the MS Windows 98 operating system Instruments using the MS Windows 2000
298. ny reference waveform because a reference waveform is a static saved waveform and offset adjusts the acquisi tion hardware for acquiring live waveforms Also TDR waveforms if displayed in rho or ohm units cannot be adjusted for vertical offset The vertical offset of a math waveform cannot be adjusted directly You can adjust the offset of waveform sources waveforms included in the math expression for the math waveform if the sources are live waveforms Keys to Using The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up input scaling offset and position to properly acquire your waveforms Sampling Modules Selection and Signal Connection Select the sampling module optical or electrical that best fits your sampling task whether it is connecting to a fiber or electrical cable to test a digital data stream or to a test fixture through SMA cables to characterize a device The connection to the sampling module depends on your application Tektronix provides 80E00 series electrical and 80C00 series optical sampling modules for this instrument you can read about any sampling module and its connections in the sampling module user manual s that shipped with your product Insert your sampling module user manual s in Appendix C at the back of this manual for ready reference You can also check your Tektronix catalog for connection accessories that may support your application Up to eight acquisition channels ar
299. o learn about using online help End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 123 Data Input and Output To Recall Your Waveform Overview To recall a waveform Prerequisites 1 Display the Re call Waveform dialog box recall waveforms into references Use the procedure that follows to recall a waveform to a reference You can only NOTE Reference waveforms do not recall because they are already instrument resident You can copy a reference waveform to another reference first display the reference to be copied and then use the Save Waveform procedure to save it to another reference R1 R8 The instrument must have appropriate sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up From the application menu bar select File and then select Recall Waveform See illustration at right The Recall Waveform dialog box allows navigation to directories lists waveform files in the directory and provides for selection of a waveform file Comments for selected files appear in the comment box See below Recall Waveform 2 x 3 124 Look in abt Al cel By a MainC2 wf File name MainC1 wfm Files of type Waveform files wfm wdb x Close Comment Recall into R2 empty z reference Control elements amp resources See Sampling Module User Manuals for sampling module installation m See Power On Instrument on page 1 13
300. o skip selecting a source The instrument supports a single histogram so the current histogram is automatically selected If no histogram is enabled in the Hist Setup dialog box the Histogram button will be disabled in the Export dialog box To Use an Exported How you use the exported waveform or histogram depends on your application Waveform or Histogram The following example is a simple application using a waveform the procedure is general and may require adapting for your spreadsheet or other data analysis tool Overview To use exported waveforms Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 MS Excel 97 running on a PC or on the instrument 2 Access to a waveform exported by the instrument m See To Export Your Waveform on page 3 128 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 129 Data Input and Output Overview To use exported waveforms cont Control elements amp resources Import the 3 In Excel select Open from the File menu Use the Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 waveform data dialog box that pops up to navigate to the directory Wei cee a halves alee best describes your data containing the file riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data In the dialog that displays make the selections as i rae a ey ag te shown right as you navigate through the Text Import Wizard You must select delimiter as your data type comma as the delimiter type and General as your
301. ocedures from the UI application Help menu For information on configuring and installing your instrument refer to Chapter 1 Getting Started CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 2 1 Documentation Map This instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different aspects or parts of the product features and interface The table below cross references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports To read about Refer to these documents Standard accessories or packing list Graphical packing list Installation Specification amp Operation Main User Manual overviews Reference Manual CD booklets 000000009 00 All about Sampling Modules Electrical Optical or Other Modules User Manual Description The graphical packing list is one of the items you should find when you open the instrument box It shows all items as they are packaged in the box Additionally all standard accessories are listed on page 1 41 of this manual Read the Reference for a quick overview of instrument features and their usage Read the User Manual for general information about your instrument procedures on how to put it into service specifications of its performance maps of its user interface controls overviews and background on its features Specific installation information for both the operating system OS and product s
302. odules 3 6 and trigger source inputs 3 43 Exporting waveforms 3 128 Extinction ratio Glossary 4 F Fiberchannel standards supported 3 142 Firmware upgrade 1 4 Flat panel display cleaning 3 176 FrameScan Acquisition keys to using 3 31 usage limitations 3 31 FrameScan acquisition advantages 3 30 cycle 3 31 How to catch bit error 3 36 how works illustrated 3 32 overview 3 30 why use 3 30 Envelope usage limitations 3 31 FrameScan Mode How to acquire in 3 33 Front panel map 2 8 Functional tests procedure 1 21 G Gamma control 1 15 Gated measurements Glossary 4 Gated Triggering how to set 3 50 General purpose knob Glossary 4 Gigabit Ethernet 3 142 GPIB Glossary 4 Graticule Glossary 5 labels Glossary 5 one per view 3 57 H Hardware and operating system procedure 1 38 High Glossary 5 High frequency triggering 3 45 High Low tracking 3 77 methods for 3 77 HighRef measurement level Glossary 5 Histograms continuous operation of 3 154 counting 3 155 editing features 3 154 in recalled setups 3 155 Index 3 Index size 3 155 supported statistics table of 3 158 taking 3 154 to take 3 156 usage limitations 3 155 valid sources of 3 154 why use 3 154 Holdoff triggering 3 45 usable limits 3 46 Holdoff trigger Glossary 5 Bit error to capture 3 36 Horizontal Bar cursors Glossary 5 delay time Glossary 5 discussion of parameters 3 17 interrelatio
303. of a sample after a controlled incremental delay see page 3 17 The trigger event is defined as time zero for the waveform record which means that all samples are displayed relative to this point There is no internal trigger pick off from the channels rather a trigger signal must be obtained through the external trigger inputs from the system clock or from the clock recovery when available from optical modules equipped with clock recovery For those CSA8000B and TDS8000B instruments equipped with the Gated Trigger option Option GT the system allows triggering to be enabled and disabled gated based on a TTL signal at a rear panel input See the To Use Gated Trigger section on page 3 51 for more informa tion Timebase System Tells the Acquisition system to take a sample i e convert from analog to digital at some specific time relative to the trigger or clock event In more general terms synchronizes the capturing of digital samples in the Acquisition system to the trigger events generated from the Trigger system m Signal Processing Transformation System Performs a variety of trans formations or operations beginning with the most fundamental data elements in the system the channel waveforms Waveform math operations automatic measurements and histogram generation are examples Display Input Output Storage Systems Provides display control Sets the vertical scale and position of the display which controls how mu
304. of the histograms of the vertical data slice through the High logical 1 and Low logical 0 levels NRZ OMA watts P1 PO Where m P1 and PO are the average power levels of the logical 1 and 0 determined at the eye crossing This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database If a waveform database is not available no valid measurement results will be produced See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 The difference between the Max and Min vertical values of the selected waveform within the measurement region See Defining and displaying waveforms on page 3 56 NRZ Peak to Peak Max Min Where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize
305. oftware is located in each of the CD booklets accompanying the CDs For more detailed usage information see Online Help System below Read these manuals for complete information about the sampling modules you purchased how to install them in the instrument how to use them and how to protect them from ESD The user manual for Electrical and Optical Modules are provided on the product software CD as PDF files These are also available for download on the Tektronix Web site Other module user manuals are provided with the module CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Documentation Map To read about Refer to these documents In Depth Operation and UI Help Online Help System Loy ab T l l 4j FIN E S T lj l EPS ame ee eer GPIB Commands Online Programmers Guide EEE Analysis and Connectivity Tools Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy TekVISA Programming VXIplug amp play Driver Help TekVISA Excel Toolbar Help ZZ oo00 Description Access online help from the instrument for context sensitive information on virtually all controls and elements on screen Online help includes a setup guide of procedures for applying all instrument functions See Accessing Online Help on page 3 167 Access this online guide from the instrument from its Help menu Quickly find the syntax for any command and copy the command if desired R
306. on cc cece ccc cece e eee eee ee eees Assemble Equipment 0 0 cece cece eee eee nen eens Perform the Diagnostics 0 0 eee eect nen eens Perform the Compensation 0 0 cee cece eee eee eens Perform the Functional Tests 0 0 cece cece eee ee eee Perform the Hardware and Operating System Tests Windows 98 Only Accessories and Options cece cece cece cece cece ee eeeee ACCESSOS onein gris Gana ls SG ee DE ae a aad Seta es Standard ses pika ads ged acne ahaa Sede wand gurl aera Pe aa Optional isch pct Dii aa a oa Geet aa att atta ha al oaks Options CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual xi xi xii xii xiii l I I i E AR WR VE A A gs hE gh EA 1 I N PRR RR Rm BRR RP RP RRR RPP RPE f n I I AAAA RP WNNP RR BRR RRP RRP RRP RPP WNRRP mM ARP OTANANTNADDAADAAAAAWNOS WO RRR PR Table of Contents Operating Basics Reference Operational Maps cc cece eee cece cece eee e eee eeees Documentation Map 06 REEERE TEREST System Overview Maps esssssssssesssossosssossssossosss Functional Model Map oora A AEA ANE EA ce ccc eee eens Process Overview Map s saa er KNEA AEA NE ROE eens User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Display Map Single Graticule View Regutare Deakes Display Map Multiple Views essesesnssssossoeseeseeo Front Pane
307. on 3 above are not settable directly but are derived You can however check the resolution at anytime in the resolution readout push the Horizontal Menu button Also note that the Resolution knob actually adjusts the record length to increase sample density detail Independent vs Shared Window For a given time base the instrument applies the same horizontal acquisition window to all channels from which it acquires data Unlike the vertical acquisition window that you set independently for each channel the same time division resolution record length and horizontal delay from the same trigger point that you set for a time base apply to all channels in that time base In other words one trigger from a single trigger source will locate a common horizontal acquisition window on all active channels which you can shift by setting the horizontal position control The horizontal acquisition window determines the waveform records extracted from all signals present at all active channels and math waveforms You can think of the horizontal acquisition window as cutting across any input signals present in the input channels to extract the same slice of time into waveform records See Figure 3 5 Common record start Chi record point and record length Common trigger Ch record N J Common horizontal Ch3 record delay Ch4 record Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate f
308. on page B 69 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 Pk Pk The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude values of the waveform in the measurement region See example on page B 63 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RMS The true root mean square value of the waveform over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 RMS Noise One standard deviation of the waveform amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with t
309. on screen relative to first point You can find the horizontal readout both in the dialog box and in the control bar at the bottom of the screen The following relationships hold Time to First Point Horiz Position when Horiz Ref Position is set to zero tl or t2 readouts Time to First Point Additional Time to Cursor Cursor Units Depend on Sources A cursor that measures amplitude or time will read out in the units of its source as indicated in Table 3 7 Note mixed sources require the delta readouts to follow the units of the cursor 1 source Table 3 7 Cursor units Cursors Readout names Horizontal vi v2 Av Vertical tt 12 At Waveform v1 v2 Av t1 t2 At 1 If the v1 and v2 units do not match the Av readout defaults to the units used by the vi readout if the t1 and t2 units do not match the At readout units defaults to t1 readout units CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Take a Cursor Use the procedure that follows to take cursor measurements on waveforms Measurement Overview To take cursor measurements Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 At least one waveform must be selected on screen Or you can set cursor values directly using the procedure referenced at right See To Set the Cursor Sources on page 3 90 Take cursor 2 Press the CURSORS button see right Press measurements DEFAULT D CAD Cane J CURSORS AL ACQUISITION
310. or all channels CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Setting Acquisition Controls Why Use What s Special This section overviews the instrument acquisition features those that start and stop acquisitions and those that control how the instrument processes the data as it is acquired just sampled or averaged or enveloped Special features keys to using and operation controls are covered Vertical Acquisition offset mode CY Q OY YM amp Horizontal Horizontal Record scale position length Use the acquisition controls to optimize and tailor the acquisition of your waveforms The mode controls described here operate on the data as the instrument acquires it perhaps to reduce noise in the waveform record or to capture a record of min max values for each data point in the waveform record The acquisition controls also let you start and stop acquisition as well as take certain actions after acquisition stops such as to print the acquired waveform Stop After Options You can set the condition upon which acquisition stops such as after a number of acquisitions or a number of mask hits you specify You can set the instrument to save waveforms or print the screen to a file or printer FrameScan Acquisition You can alter the normal acquisition cycle to produce a waveform record suitable for acquiring and analyzing Pseudo Random Bit Streams PRBS s which are contained wit
311. orizontal scale to produce a waveform display based on the Autoset mode selected Edge Period or Bit Eye Pattern Sometimes Autoset cannot produce a correct display due to the nature of the input signal if so you may have to adjust the scale trigger and acquisition controls manually Some conditions that can cause Autoset to fail are m no Signal present m signals with extreme or variable duty cycles m signals with multiple or unstable signal periods m signals with too low amplitude m no recognizable trigger signal m no eye diagram waveform present when autosetting in Bit Eye Pattern autoset mode Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations The size of the vertical acquisition window is determined by the operating range of the the sampling module and any probe connected to it The vertical offset determines where the vertical window is positioned relative to ground Parts of the signal amplitude that fall within the vertical window are acquired parts outside if any are not they are clipped As an example consider that a basic 80E00 series sampling module with a maximum 100 mV div scale covers 1 volt over 10 divisions Changing the vertical scale setting only changes how much of the vertical window displays on screen changing vertical position simply changes the space on the screen where the data is displayed You can set the vertical scale position and offset of each channel independently of other channels CSA8
312. orm parameters Graticule labels Each graticule displays three labels The upper and lower left labels indicate the amplitude level at each of the upper and lower boundaries of the graticule edges These levels are based on the vertical scale and offset of the selected waveform The lower right label is horizontal scale factor of the selected waveform expressed in units per division High The value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details HighRef The waveform high reference level used in such measurements as fall time and rise time Typically set to 90 See Levels Used in Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details Holdoff trigger A specified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Trigger holdoff helps ensure a stable display Horizontal Acquisition Window A common time window or range that is applied to all channels in parallel to determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record Trigger and horizontal controls determine the duration of this window and its placement in the incoming signal Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the amplitude parameters of a waveform The instrument displays the value of both cursors with respect to gro
313. oss to generate a trigger on edge trigger mode Uptime The number of hours the instrument has been powered on Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The instrument displays the value of both cursors with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Vertical Acquisition Window The range of values the acquisition system can acquire The maximum vertical size is set by the operating range of the sampling module installed and that of any probe installed on the sampling module For example an 80E00 sampling module set to its maximum 100mV div scale yields a 10 division vertical acquisition window of 1V The vertical offset determines where in the operating range of the A D converter sampler the signal is positioned relative to ground Changing vertical position will simply change the space on the screen where the data is displayed CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary View Any one of the three waveform displays the instrument provides Main Mag1 and Mag2 Each view has its own graticule and time base The instrument always displays the Main view the Mag and Mag2 views can be added and removed from the display using the View buttons on the front panel Virtual keyboard A pop up keyboard that lets you click to type characters for the control from which it is opened such as in the vertical scale and offset controls found in
314. ount box is enabled enter a count None F Filename Select a Stop After action from the drop down list box a 4 ing Bel Choose from the following actions Help None Print Screen to File Print Screen to Printer Save all Waveforms Enter a filename for saving to if you ve selected Print to File or Save all Waveforms Click to check Ring Bell if you want audio notice when acquisition stops Start acquisition 8 Push the RUN STOP front panel button to begin acquiring See To Start and Stop Acquisition on page 3 26 End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 25 Acquiring Waveforms To Startand Use the procedure that follows to start and stop acquisition Stop Acquisition Overview To start and stop acquisition Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls set up Triggering should also be set up See sampling module user manuals for sampling module installation See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup in this manual To start 2 Make sure all the channels to be acquired are turned on see ACQUBITION acquiring use the channel buttons see page 3 9 if needed Then push the RUN STOP button to begin acquiring To stop 3 Push the RUN STOP button to stop acquisition ACQUISITI
315. ources Setup Utilities Help Trig Vertical Horizontal Acquire Fro Trigger cq Mc Mask Nisnlan See page 3 167 to learn about using online help CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Localize a Measurement Use the procedure that follows to set gates on a measurement source which forces the measurement to be taken over a segment of the waveform otherwise the entire waveform feeds the measurement To gate a measurement Related control elements and resources ZZ 0007 Overview Prerequisites 1 Set up as from last procedure See To Take an Automatic Measurement on page 3 24 Access the From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities Help Trig gates select Measurement See right Vertical ay Horizontal Acquire SLE A Trigger Mask Nisnlan Enable and Select the Region tab to expose the gate controls Click Access to virtual keyboard position the to check the box as indicated at right to turn gating on gates and to display the gates on screen SourceX Source2 Set to Defaut If Annotations are not on click the Annotations box or DE PAn HiLow Rettevel the gates will not display r200 us ra Vary to position gates lt meme Use the G1 Gate1 and G2 spin controls or click ands ss feoos mE fame type in values see right to adjust the gates on screen Pe d such that the area to measure is between the gates Check to display gat
316. ow to start and stop 3 26 input channels and digitizers 3 27 modes for starting and stopping 3 22 overview 3 27 preventing aliasing 3 23 record 3 28 record length 3 28 sample interval 3 28 sampling see Sampling 3 27 3 29 set Stop mode amp action 3 25 time base Glossary 9 trigger point 3 28 triggering 3 39 Acquisition control background 3 27 overview 3 21 Acquisition controls keys to using 3 22 vs Display controls 3 58 why use 3 21 Acquisition mode Average Glossary 2 Envelope Glossary 4 Sample Glossary 8 Acquisition modes description of 3 22 how to set 3 24 Acquisition settings purpose 3 21 Active cursor Glossary 1 Address Tektronix xiii Aliasing 3 23 Glossary 1 AOP average optical power Glossary 2 Annotations Glossary 1 Application toolbar 3 127 Attenuation Glossary 1 Attenuators external use of 3 6 Auto trigger mode 3 41 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Automatic measurement Glossary 1 Automatic measurements 3 74 annotations 3 74 behavior with databases 3 76 categories for selection 3 76 database as source requirement exclusion 3 76 databases as sources 3 75 dual waveform 3 76 high low tracking 3 77 methods for 3 77 how to localize gates 3 83 how to take 3 80 independent characterization of 3 75 number available 3 76 reference level methods 3 79 sources available 3 76 statistics on 3 75 usage limitations 3 76 what s measured 3 74 why use 3 74
317. p TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases selected as its source Histogram data is continuously accumulated and displayed until you explicitly turn it off or clear the waveform data of the histogram source What s Excluded Histograms longer than 500 bins Histograms are limited to the on screen resolution limiting horizontal sizes of 500 bins Multiple histograms One histogram can be displayed on one source at a time The source can be any waveform in any of the three Views Main Mag or Mag2 Keys to Using The following key points describe operating considerations for setting up the Histograms histograms so that they best support your data analysis tasks Histogram Counting Stays On Once you check Enable Histogram in the Histogram Setup dialog histogram counting starts and continues until you turn disable the histogram or clear the histogram counts If the histogram is not displayed on the graticule but histogram statistics still appear on the display histogram counting is still running NOTE Histogram counts are cleared when push Clear button in the Hist Setup dialog box or when you push CLEAR DATA on the front panel Also changing any acquisition control will implicitly clear all acquired data and the histogram count as well Histogram Size The maximum vertical histogram size is 400 bins The maximum horizontal size is 500 bins Recalling Setups The histogram state is restored to
318. pear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property A A Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Earth Terminal O Mains Disconnected Mains Connected OFF Power ON Power Standby X CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Preface About This Manual This is the user manual for the CSA8000B Communications Signal Analyzer and TDS8000B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope It covers the following information Describes the capabilities of the instrument how to install it and reinstall its software Explains how to operate the instrument how to control acquisition of processing of and input output of information Lists the specifications and accessories of the instrument This manual is composed of the following chapters Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and provides an incoming ins
319. pection procedure Operating Basics uses maps to describe the various interfaces for controlling the instrument including the front panel and the software user interface These maps provide overviews of the product and its functions from several viewpoints Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics see Overview on page 3 1 that describe the instrument interface and features and that give background and basic information on how to use them The online help onboard the instrument application describes the interface features and their usage in more detail detailed descriptions of all programming commands are found in the online CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Programmer Guide manual Appendices provides additional information including the specifications and automatic measurement definitions CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual xi Preface Related Manuals and Online Documents This manual is part of a document set of standard accessory manuals and online documentation this manual mainly focuses on installation and background needed to use the product features See the following list for other documents supporting instrument operation and service Manual part numbers are listed in Table 1 3 on page 1 41 Manual name CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Online Help CSA8000B amp TDS8000B References CSA8000 amp TDS8000 Programmer Guide Electrical Sampling Modules User Manual 80C00 Series Optical Sampling Modules User Manual 80A01 Trigger
320. positioning and DC offsetting of channels Number of channels depends on sampling modules installed CH1 O Sampler Digitizer CH2 O Sampler Digitizer alt al Sampling module Instrument cH3 Sampler Digitizer CHn O Sampler Digitizer at al Sampling module Instrument Figure 3 7 Channel configuration Sampling Process Acquisition is the process of sampling an analog input signal of an input channel converting it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record which is then stored in acquisition memory Sampling then is the process that provides one sample per trigger event and when taken from CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 27 Acquiring Waveforms Sampling Modes Waveform Record 3 28 repeated trigger events also provides the digitized signal data from which the instrument assembles the waveform record see Figure 3 9 on page 3 29 The signal parts within the vertical range of the sampler are digitized See Figure 3 8 V z ov ov OV oV T 0 5 V 0 5 V Input signal Sampled points Digital values Figure 3 8 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing The instrument acquisition system can process the data as it is acquired averaging or enveloping the waveform data to produce enhanced waveform records Once the waveform record exists enhanced or not you can use the post processing capabilities of the instrument to fur
321. priate external framing signal must be sampling module installation applied to the trigger input m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and The acquisition mode must be set to Sample or page 3 48 for trigger setup in this manual Average Envelope cannot be used with FrameScan acquisitions The vertical and horizontal controls and triggering must be set to acquire the signal Access the 5 From the application menu bar select Setup and then Setup Utilities Help Triggered FrameScan select Horizontal See right Vertical controls Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors wim Database TDR Set the frame 6 In the Horz Setup dialog box click the Units Bits option All Timebases duration button Mode Lock to Int 10MH2 l heck for bits units PS pits C Di Enter the total number of bits you wish to scan the Check for bits units y p recone Bile C Distance frame duration in the Scan Bits box You must always Comm Standard None a set this parameter manually 2c FrameScan Tip You can set Units to Seconds if you prefer but F Enabled T Auto Position Bits usually makes the set up and use of FrameScan acquisition easier s E Enter bits to be scanned CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 33 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To acquire in FrameScan mode cont Control elements and resources Set the bit rate 8 Set the horizontal scale so one ac
322. ps up N Type a new name in the Waveform Label box The ae instrument will use the new label to mark the selected Copy waveform in the graticule area Send To Back Y Show Color Grade Waveform Properties 2 x Waveform E Waveform Label C3 Vertical Scale fioo Om ae fioo omw AE jo C3 a Vertical Position Vertical Offset Horizontal Scale f200 0p ae Horizontal Position Choose a color from the Color pulldown list Click OK to dismiss the dialog Color grade a 7 Right click on the channel waveform or its icon See waveform right Waveform Icon Choose Color Grade from the menu that pops up NI Ca Color grading a waveform is one of several instrument off operations that uses a waveform database There are Copy four available so no more than four waveforms can be __ Send To Back color graded at the same time show Properties a ftooomv BRA foc 3 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview Reduce a wave form to its icon Change grati cule style and color For further assistance Right click on the waveform or its icon See right 10 Choose Show from the menu that pops up to toggle the waveform between shown checked and hidden unchecked Tip Hiding a waveform is useful when you temporarily want to remove the display of a waveform without turning it off Hidden waveforms change their waveform icons in the Waveform ba
323. ption GT that lets you disable or enable gate triggering based on a TTL signal you connect to the instrument rear panel m the GT feature also allows you to use recirculating buffers as part of your test setup to simulate the effects of very long optical links that are typical of undersea cables and other long terrestrial links m analysis and connectivity tools enable the instrument to be controlled from a variety of local and remote environments and to share data with other commercially available analysis programs m pre defined built in masks in addition to the user defined masks m a large 10 inch color display that supports color grading of waveform data to show sample density m an intuitive UI User Interface with built in online help displayable on screen Product Software The instrument includes the following software MS Windows comes preinstalled on the instrument MS Windows is the operating system on which the user interface application of this instrument runs The OS Rebuild CDs include the software needed to rebuild the instrument operating system if that becomes necessary m The User Interface UI Application product software comes preinstalled on the instrument This UI application complements the hardware controls of the front panel allowing complete set up of all instrument features The Product Software CD includes the UI Application for use if reinstalling the CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 3
324. quirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL3111 1 Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The installation categories are CAT III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level includes appliances portable tools and similar products Equipment is usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service Test and measuring Class 1 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Annex H grounded product Overvoltage Category II as defined in IEC 61010 1 Annex J
325. quisition record is Timebases equal to one bit Use one of the two methods that follow Mode Lock taint 10MH2 Select a comm Units Automatic If your signal to be scanned matches a standard a EJs Lae communications standard select it from the Comm Bami Sas e Standard list Choosing a standard sets the bit rate Set the bitrate 2452 52 and start bit otherwise if you know the bit rate you manually can set the bit rate manually using the Bit Rate box FrameSe an Manual Adjust the Scale control to a setting that Set to 1 8 bit results in a display of both edges of the bit For per division rimabaes example setting 1 8 of a bit per division 0 125 EAEN bits div yields 1 bit in 8 divisions which fits nicely Seale on screen Position 14 21bits aH Set the starting 9 Set the initial horizontal position to the first bit you want l ae Saas ene horizontal posi to acquire Use one of the two methods that follow First set the N aoe ee gees tion re eae Automatic Enter your desired start bit location and adherente Hep then check the Auto Position box to enable the Ato posila a instrument to set the position as near as possible to match the bit specified in the Start Bit box p Timebase n f oe Manual Adjust the Position control to align the ee start of a bit to desired location in the frame Position 14 21hits aH i i Or set y Tip
326. r QA Win32 does not trap these keys when performing the keyboard test Do not press them CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Incoming Inspection Checking the Cooling Fan Power on the instrument and visually inspect the left side panel of the instrument Operation to verify that all six cooling fans are rotating Equipment None required The instrument must be powered on and running Prerequisites Checking the Hardware To perform a minimal check of the hardware and Windows 98 operating system and Operating System of this instrument perform this procedure to run QA Win32 diagnostics from the Windows 98 Start menu Equipment None required Prerequisites A mouse and keyboard must be connected to the instrument and it must be powered on 1 Push the RUN STOP front panel button to stop acquisition 2 Use CTRL ALT DEL to close the TDS CSA8000 application 3 Click Start then select Programs and then Sykes Diagnostics in the Start Menu Finally click QA Win32 NOTE You may experience a delay before the program starts 4 Click Tools on the menu bar then click Customize Test 5 Click Default and exit this dialog by clicking OK 6 Select and execute the following tests individually by clicking on the test buttons see the illustration on page 1 40 one at a time see note and clicking Start a COM Ports b LPT Ports c System Board d System Info e USB f Video CSA8000B amp TDS8000B Use
327. r service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or consumables d to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product or e to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the frequency and as prescribed in the user manual if applicable THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary cc cece cece cece ence ee eees Pre fae ii46i0 5 e580 9 See aaa Ses ae Re Ree ES aE ole OE WA Ree es About This Manual 0 ccc eee cnet nent ene nen Related Manuals and Online Documents 0 0 cece cence eens
328. r Manual Glossary Channel number The number assigned to a specific signal input channel of an installed sampling module Assignment of channel numbers is described in Maximum Configuration on page 1 11 Channel waveforms Waveforms resulting from signals input into sampling module channels and digitized and acquired by the instrument See Live Waveforms Control knob see Knob Coupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information can be transferred from one to the other This instrument supports direct coupling only at its inputs the user must provide any alternate coupling ac frequency filtering externally Cursors Any of three styles of paired markers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform locations The instrument displays the values expressed in vertical or horizontal units of the position of each cursor and the distance between the two cursors Delay time See Horizontal Delay Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing Display system The part of the instrument that displays the three graticules one each for the Main Mag1 and Mag2 time bases the waveforms and other display related elements waveform labels cursors test masks measurement annotations
329. r Manual 1 39 Incoming Inspection 1 40 NOTE A test button is not highlighted until you select it As you select the button for each test tool tip appears when you point to the button a highlight box appears around the button When you click Start the button blinks until the test is complete and the highlight box changes color to indicate the test is complete SF QA win32 File View Diagnostics Report Tools Help Start O Stop Q a vil G Fal O Cust 2 aj es gt 9 AEE Follow any instructions appearing on the screen 7 Check test results in scrollable results listing in the Test Results window of the QAPlus test window All tests should pass 8 Close the QA Win32 diagnostics by selecting Exit in the File menu or click the Control Box X in upper right corner 9 You can restart the TDS CSA8000 product software application by clicking Start then selecting Restart from the Shutdown Windows dialog box End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Accessories and Options This section lists the standard and optional accessories as well as the product options available for the instrument at the time this manual was published Accessories Standard Table 1 3 lists the standard accessories that ship with the instrument NOTE The standard accessories that ship with any instrument modules are not listed here Each instrument module ships in its own package
330. r left of screen as shown E Waveform shown Waveform hidden From the application menu bar select Setup and then select Display See right Use the graticule controls to select a graticule style Select the color of the screen from the Background pulldown list Select the color of the graticule from the Foreground pulldown list Click the 3 button to close the Setup Display dialog box Click the 24 icon in the the upper right corner of the Display Setup dialog box and then click any dialog box control to pop up help on that control Click the Help button in the Display Setup dialog box to access a context sensitive overview of the display controls and their set up End of Procedure CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Customizations you can make cont Related control elements and resources 18 Off i Copy AGA Send To Back Color Grade Propetties E 4 fio0 omve as pov Setup Utilities Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger AWeasurement Mask TEN Cursors vetin Database TDR See Accessing Online Help on page 3 167 for overview of the online help system 3 71 Displaying Waveforms 3 72 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a ee Measuring Waveforms To assist you in analyzing the waveforms you acquire the instrument comes equipped with cursors and automatic measurements This section describes these tools and how you use them m Taking Au
331. re complicated expressions Measurement Scalars The results scalars from automatic measurements can be used in expressions For example you can use the measurement Mean on a waveform and subtract from the original waveform the scalar that results to define a new math waveform Some operations that you cannot use with math waveforms follow Math on Math You cannot use math waveforms as sources for other math waveforms For example if you have a math waveform defined as M1 C1 C2 you cannot define a second math waveform as M2 M1 C3 You can however expand the second math waveform to M2 Cl C2 C3 m Mag Time Base Expressions Sources for math expressions must be sources associated with the Main time base For example M3 C1 C2 uses these sources as acquired and displayed by the Main time base not by the Mag1 or Mag2 time base You cannot create M3 C1 Main C2 Mag1 See Table 3 8 on page 3 103 m Waveform Databases as Sources If you assign a channel to a waveform database and then use the channel in a math waveform expression the data currently acquired in the channel is used not the data accumulated in the wavetorm database over time CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Creating Math Waveforms Keys to Using The that key points that follow describe considerations for creating math waveforms best supports your data analysis tasks How to Create You create math waveforms when you create a math expr
332. rection of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing cont Name Width Width Definition The horizontal interval between the crossings of the rising and falling edges at the mid refer ence level of the first positive pulse in the measurement region Width Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the two consecutive horizontal crossings on the first positive pulse The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help Also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The horizontal interval between the crossings of the falling and rising edges at the mid refer ence level of the first negative pulse in the measurement region Width Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross2 and Tcross1 are the two consecutive horizontal crossings on the first negative pu
333. red waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 RZ Mid The middle level between the Max and Min vertical values of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region Max Min 2 Where Max and Min are the maximum and minimum measurements RZ Mid If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 21 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Min RZ Peak to Peak Definition The minimum vertical value of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1
334. reference and math waveforms CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 7 Acquiring Waveforms To Set Up the Signal Input Overview Prerequisites 1 Connect the 2 input signal To set the signal input Flexible Control Access The product provides multiple methods for adjusting acquisition controls This manual focuses on basic setup through the front panel and the use of the User Interface UI Application displayed full screen See the display maps beginning on page 2 9 for UI alternatives to controlling vertical and horizontal setup The online help system also documents the UI position input signals for acquisition Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to scale and CAUTION Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual The instrument must be installed with sampling modules in place The acquisition system should be set to run continuously Related control elements and resources Also an appropriate trigger signal must be routed to the See the sampling module user manuals for sampling instrument and triggering must be set up module installation See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 48 for trigger setup in this manual Connect to the signal to be acquired using proper probing connecting techniques See the user manual for
335. rement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best measurement results Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 27 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name RZ Suppression Ratio dB Definition The ratio of the average power level of the logic High to the Suppressed level measured between two consecutive RZ pulses with the result expressed in decibels The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High is determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper half of the pulse The same region is sampled to record the data distribution in the lower half of the pulse data corresponding to the logical level 0 Similarly data is sampled in an equivalent sized region placed at one half bit interval offset from the Eye Aperture The mean of the histogram of the data distribution between the peaks adjusted by subtracting the zero level histogram yields the Suppressed level RZ Suppression Ratio dB 10 x Seer Where m High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels m Suppress is the mean of the histogram of the data wit
336. rent stp g a EyeHistogram stp a FrameScant stp a FrameScan2 stp a ProtoE val01 stp a ProtoE val02 stp File name ProtoE val03 stp Save as type Setup Files stp x Comment Does TDA on StarComm prototype Requires 80E04 sampling module in C304 See Test Spec StarComm_TDRO34 ica Name a 5 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons see right EET HE destination to navigate to the directory in which to save your setup sein usar 5 3 al ef Tip If you save the setup file in the MS Windows Startup directory the saved preferences will be loaded with each MS Windows startup 3 116 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To save your setup cont Control elements amp resources Name your 6 setup Add a comment 8 optional Save your setup 9 For more 10 information Name your setup file by either m accepting the default file name that appears in the File name text box Clicking in the File name text box and typing a new name replacing the default file name clicking an existing name in the file list if any are listed Data in existing file will be overwritten Tip If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the virtual keyboard icon indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields If not selected sele
337. revents recovery of normal operation CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 5 Power consumption and cooling Specifications Power requirements Source voltage and frequency Fuse rating Cooling requirements Table A 6 Display Specifications Display type Display resolution Pixel pitch CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Characteristics 240 watts fully loaded 160 watts mainframe alone with no modules An example of a fully loaded mainframe for these characteristic loads has installed optical modules electrical modules and active probes comprised of 1x80C02 CR 1x80C04 CR2 3x80E04 1x80A01 and 7xP6209 There is typically a slight 10 W deviation in the dissipation for various line conditions ranging from 48 Hz through 400 Hz as well as operating ambient temperature Range for the line voltage needed to power the instrument within which the instrument meets its performance requirements 100 240 V RMS 10 50 60 Hz 115 V RMS 10 400 Hz CAT Il Current and voltage ratings and type of the fuse used to fuse the source line voltage Two sizes can be used 0 25 x 1 25 inch size UL 198G amp CSA C22 2 No 59 Fast acting 8 Amp 250 V Tek p n 159 0046 00 BUSSMAN p n ABC 8 LITTLE FUSE p n 314008 5 x 20 mm size IEC 127 sheet 1 fast acting F high breaking capacity 6 3 Amp 250 V Tek p n none BUSSMAN p n GDA 6 3 LITTLEFUSE p n 21606 3 Si
338. rizontal Reference 100 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 59 Displaying Waveforms TOUCH SCREEN 3 60 Horizontal Units You can specify the time values in seconds bits or distance from the Horizontal Setup dialog box When you select Distance as the timebase units the timebase scale and position controls and the readouts use appear with distance units You can select from meters feet or inches as your distance unit The timing measurement results remain as seconds The dialog box also provides a Dielectric Const ant and Prop agation Velocity controls with which you can select either the effective dielectric constant of the device under test or its propagation velocity they interact so set one or the other Distance units and these other two controls are useful when doing TDR measurements and testing You may want to turn on distance units and set the dielectric constant or propagation velocity when making such measurements The formula is D v T where D distance per division Co vDielectricConst C speed of light in a vacuum 2 997925 e8 meters s v propogation velocity T time per division Velocity of Propagation vp is a measure of how fast a signal travels in that transmission line DielectricConst is the relative effective dielectric constant of the propagation media Mouse and Touchscreen Operation This instrument ships with a mouse and keyboard to give you more options
339. rk Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The true root mean square amplitude of the selected waveform within the measurement region See Defining and displaying waveforms on page 3 56 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition NRZ RMS Noise One standard deviation of the amplitude variance sampled within a fixed width vertical slice located at the center of the Eye Aperture at the High logical 1 or Low logical 0 levels RMS noise Higho or R
340. rm database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 NRZ Mean The arithmetic mean of the selected waveform within the measurement region See Defining and displaying waveforms on page 3 56 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 43 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name B 44 NRZ Mid NRZ Min Definition The middle level between the Max and Min vertical values of the selected waveform within the measurement region
341. ro bin The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 2 standard deviations of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram Displays the number of hits within or on the histogram box Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Using Waveform Databases A waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of a source waveform as it is repeatedly acquired In addition to the standard vertical and horizontal dimensions each waveform sample in a waveform database has a third dimen sion of count The count reflects the number of times a specific waveform point has been acquired or generated Why Use Use waveform databases for measurements histogram calculations mask testing and generating a density style graded display Waveform databases may be automatically allocated for measurements histograms and mask testing What s Special Some waveform database features of note follow m Waveform record length is not limited to 500 horizontal waveform database dimension and number of horizontal display columns when waveform databases are active Record l
342. rocedures setups you want to make From the application menu bar select Help and then select Help Contents and Index See right From the list of topics book icons that displays double click Setup Procedures and double click Setup dialog procedures Help Contents and Index Getting Started Guide Measurements Center Measurements Reference Programmer Guide About TOS CSA8000 10 Select a procedure from the list that displays The procedure will display in a help window that is sized and located to minimize interference with the controls needed to perform it See below Setup Utilities x F Mask TDR Disp Wim Database Hist Cursor Meas TZN A Giaa ver Horz Acq Tig i r Acquisition Mode Sample AE ji C Average Click Acquisition in the zj Setup menu Select an acquisition l mode sample average or r Stop After envelope If you select average use the spinbox Run Stop Button Only to select the number of C Condition samples to average Select a Stop After Histogram Waveforms 7 condition This tells the instrument when to stop o acquiring Select Run Stop f Button Only to use the i j Stop Action Runv Stop button in the Nne A toolbar to start and stop T acquisition Select ji Filename Condition and select a al stop condition from the 5 ul ee list Lloe the zl il E Ring Bell cs 4 ao omv BE joo
343. rom the Low Level 4 Absolute Reference is set by absolute values in user units 5 AOP not shown measures the Average Optical Power of the waveform and uses it as the Mid Ref level See Pulse Crossings and Mid reference Level AOP on page B 58 for more information Reference level calculation methods High 50 mV High reference Mid reference 0 mV Low reference Low 50 mV Figure 3 21 Reference level calculation methods The High and Low levels from which the reference levels are calculated in methods 1 3 above are the levels established using the selected High Low tracking method described in High Low Tracking Method on page 3 77 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 79 Measuring Waveforms Overview 3 80 To Take Automatic Measurements The instrument must display the waveform to be measured on screen The AOP method is the Average Optical Power reference level This reference level selection is best used when taking the Optical Modulation Amplitude OMA measurement on a pulse waveform The AOP setting is ignored for NRZ waveforms This method is selected by default when measurement type is set to OMA See the OMA measurement on page B 5 Default Methods The waveform characterization methods just covered the High Low tracking and the reference level calculation methods used can be set for each measurement and its waveform source in the Meas Setup dialog
344. ropri ate clock recovery capable sampling module installed You must have the clock recovery capable module installed in the same compartment as when the setup was saved To Save Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to save a setup to the instrument hard disk a floppy disk or third party storage device CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 115 Data Input and Output Overview To save your setup Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have appropriate sampling modules in place before powering on the instrument Instrument must be powered up Set up the instrument controls as you want them saved See Sampling Module User Manuals for as part of a recallable setup sampling module installation For help in making your setup check the references at m See Power On Instrument on page 1 13 right and other sections in this chapter specific to the setup you wish to make m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup m See page 3 48 for trigger setup Display the 4 From the application menu bar select File and then File Edt View Setup Utiies Hel Save Setup dia select Save Setup See illustration at right ee log box j Save Waveform The Save Setup dialog box allows for the entry of a file Bed ae name file type and includes a field for adding your N comments See below Brint CurleP Print Setup Recent File Save Setup HEI Exit Save ini 9 Setups amp al ct a Cur
345. rporation If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface Optical Connector Cleaning 3 176 When using optical modules the measurement accuracy is increased or maintained by keeping the optical connectors clean It s important to follow the procedures for cleaning optical connectors provided in the optical module user manual CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual EE ee Appendix A Specifications NOTE This specification is for the instrument there are also specifications associated with the optical and electrical modules Please refer to the user manual that shipped with your module for those specifications This appendix contains the specifications for the CSA8000B Communica tions Signal Analyzer and the TDS8000B Digital Sampling Oscilloscope All specifications are guaranteed unless noted as typical Typical specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed Specifications that are marked with the symbol are checked in Performance Verification chapter of the service manual an optional accessory All specifications apply to the instrument and sampling modules unless noted otherwise To meet specifications three conditions must first be met m The instrument must have been calibrated adjusted at an ambient tempera ture between
346. rsistence display mode 3 67 Vectors 3 67 Vectors Display menu 3 67 Verification incoming inspection procedure 1 17 Vertical Bar cursors Glossary 9 position 3 6 range acquisition window Glossary 9 scaling 3 4 set up procedure 3 8 signal connection 3 4 Vertical acquisition window Glossary 9 control set up 3 9 overview 3 14 Vertical deskew Glossary 2 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Vertical offset discussion of 3 14 illustrated 3 15 usage limitations 3 5 Vertical position illustrated 3 15 Vertical range what determines 3 14 Vertical scale and offset why use 3 4 Vertical set up purpose 3 4 View graticule 3 57 Main amp Mag 2 10 operations on selected 3 57 that magnify 3 59 time base Glossary 10 using multiple 3 57 Views multiple 3 55 Virtual keyboard Glossary 10 dialog box 3 114 3 120 Virtual keypad Glossary 10 W Waveform Acquiring of 3 3 channel Glossary 3 cursors Glossary 10 database Glossary 10 databases using 3 159 defined Glossary 10 display 2 7 overview of 3 53 displayed fit to screen 3 58 displaying 3 53 exporting 3 128 how to display in a Mag View 3 64 how to display in Main View 3 62 how to recall 3 124 how to save 3 121 how to use an exported 3 129 printing 3 132 purpose of databases 3 159 recalling 3 120 saved Glossary 9 saving 3 120 selected 3 7 Glossary 8 Waveform display elements of 3 54 customizing 3 66 why use 3
347. rument You can also operate the instrument while it rests upright on its rear feet If you operate the instrument while it is resting on the rear feet make sure that you properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid damaging them CAUTION Keep the bottom of the instrument clear of obstructions to ensure proper cooling CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 9 Installation Operating Requirements Rackmount Requirements Specifications in Appendix A list the operating requirements for the instrument Power source and temperature humidity and altitude are listed If this instrument is rackmounted see the TDS8000 amp CSA8000 Rackmount Instructions for additional site considerations or operating requirements This document ships with the Option 1R rackmount kit Install the Sampling Modules A A Check Your Sampling Module Manual s CAUTION Do not install or remove any sampling modules while the instrument is powered on Always power the instrument down before attempting to remove or insert any sampling module CAUTION Sampling modules are inherently vulnerable to static damage Always observe static safe procedures and cautions as outlined in your sampling module user manual Read the appropriate sampling module user manual for instructions on how to install your sampling modules and then install them as outlined Sampling modules do not ship preinstalled
348. rview To set high color Control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 Waveforms must be displayed on screen 2 Your Printer must be accessible and configured properly m See Acquiring Waveforms on page 3 3 m See Triggering on page 3 39 m See Displaying Waveforms on page 3 53 See your printer instructions and or the Windows Help See page 3 161 for information on accessing Window help Access the 3 Click the minimize button in the upper right corner Display Prop of the UI application to expose the desktop erties dialog box 4 Right click the desktop and select Properties from the menu that pops up Active Desktop gt Arrange Icons gt Line Up Icons Refresh Properties CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 137 Data Input and Output Overview Select the Set 5 tings Tab Select and Set 6 High Color 3 138 In the Display Properties dialog box that displays click the Settings tab Click the monitor 1 icon if necessary in the Settings dialog box Select High Color in the Colors list box Click OK to apply changes If a confirmation box appears click its OK button End of Procedure To set high color cont Control elements amp resources Background Screen Saver Appearance Effects web Settings r Wallpaper Select an HTML Document or a picture Browse Pattern A i z ivets Display kepis em ina
349. s are adjustable and default to 10 and 90 of the pulse amplitude There are four Reference Level Calculation methods available for determining these reference levels See Measurement Reference Parameters and Methods on page B 56 or in the online help Also see Reference Levels Method on page 3 79 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first rising edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 The time variance on the time crossings of data sampled at the mid reference level RMS Jitter is defined as one standard deviation o of that variance RMS Jitter Teross o Where Tcrosso is one standard deviation of the variance of crossing times for a histogram of the Tcross values Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first positive or negative crossing The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first falling edge but the Di
350. s as Period and Duty Cycle Typically set to 50 See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details Mid2Ref The middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in two waveform time measure ments such as the Delay and Phase measurements See Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements on page 3 79 for more details Non Return to Zero NRZ A waveform type for of a source to be measured OMA Optical Modulation Amplitude The difference between the average power levels of the logic 1 level High and the logic 0 level Low of the optical pulse signal The levels are the Means of the logical levels sampled within an Aperture of the logical 1 and 0 regions of the pulse The logical 1 and 0 time intervals are marked by the crossings of a reference level determined as the Average Optical Power AOP of the signal Persistence The amount of time a data point remains displayed There are three persistence modes available in the instrument Variable Infinite and Color Grading Pixel A visible point on the display The instrument display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Pop up menu A menu that displays when you right click an application element such as a channel or its icon a measurement or other readout Usually provides quick access to settings related to the object clicked Probe An instrument input devi
351. s of the chassis with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis that may damage the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and wipe with a clean cloth dampened with deionized water Use only deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or front panel buttons Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 175 Cleaning the Instrument Flat Panel Display Cleaning A The instrument display is a soft plastic display and must be treated with care during cleaning CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel display Avoid using abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display surface Avoid spraying liquids directly on the display surface Avoid scrubbing the display with excessive force Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean room wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Clark Co
352. se on page 3 162 Access the 2 Open the Waveform Database dialog box by selecting Setup Utiities Help THi Wfm Database Wim Database in the Setup menu i panin i c Setup dialog box mee Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors TDR Set Persistence 3 Choose a persistence mode Persistence Infinite Choose Infinite to continue displaying Infinite WA waveforms as they accumulate until the selected Variable y database is cleared manually or by a control change 1 2000 Variable Choose Variable to display accumulated data in the specified database until the user specified waveform count is surpassed Each waveform Samples Waveforms 299 accumulated beyond the count removes the oldest waveform accumulated earlier in the database Waveforms For Variable persistence use the Waveforms entry box or the sliding control above it to set the Waveforms count The count applies to the currently selected database when Variable persistence mode is set Enter values directly with this control using the up down arrows the pop up keypad or an externally connected keyboard Samples The Samples field is a readout sample count currently in effect for the currently selected database when Variable persistence mode is set This count is not settable directly but instead derives from the product two values the current Waveforms setting in this dialog box and the setting for Record Length in the Horizontal
353. ses its existing source CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 159 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 160 Keys to Using m If all four databases are assigned and you attempt to implicitly assign a waveform source to a database for example by right clicking a waveform icon in the Waveform bar and selecting color grading the instrument will display a notice that no databases are available NOTE The above exclusion does not mean that a waveform database cannot be used by multiple systems or features For example you can use the same database as the source for a histogram an automatic measurement and a mask test Interpolation or vector displays Waveform database accumulation is always a dot mode accumulation therefore no interpolation or vectoring is performed The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up a waveform database Dimensions Waveform database dimensions match those of the database source and are described as follows Horizontal columns Always 500 columns which is the maximum horizontal graticule view size Columns are in horizontal units that match the horizontal units of the source m Vertical rows Always 402 rows which is the maximum vertical graticule size plus one row each for overrange OR and underrange UR Rows are in vertical units that match the vertical units of the source Count weights or density up to 32 bits Display
354. sition works scanning on a 127 bit PRBS shown cc cee cece cece ween enees 3 32 Figure 3 11 Slope and level define the trigger event 3 41 vi CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 12 Triggered versus untriggered displays 3 41 Figure 3 13 Trigger inputs ccc cece eee rere e eee 3 42 Figure 3 14 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers 3 46 Figure 3 15 Trigger to End Of Record Time EORT 3 47 Figure 3 16 Display elements cece eee ce cee ceees 3 54 Figure 3 17 Horizontal position includes time to Horizontal Reference si a ae he ere ora he agarose aie bie eats eal ieee EA 3 59 Figure 3 18 Graticule cursor and automatic measurements 3 73 Figure 3 19 Measurement annotations on a waveform 3 75 Figure 3 20 High Low tracking methods 0eeeeee 3 78 Figure 3 21 Reference level calculation methods 3 79 Figure 3 22 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes 3 86 Figure 3 23 Components determining Time cursor readout VALUES era re Sale a8 ie ar SEs Ws ace i eee oe Rees eA Nee eee 3 88 Figure 3 24 Functional transformation of an acquired WAVEROMIN ortfa a EEE AREE is Ae eee eo ace a a eee 3 101 Figure 3 25 Export dialog box ccc ccc e eee eeeeeee 3 129 Figure 3 26 Creating a user mask 0 cece cece eeeees 3 144 Figure 3 27 Adding a new vertex
355. slope from the toolbar at the top of the display or in the Trigger Setup dialog box The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs The instrument lets you set the trigger level from the front panel with the Trigger LEVEL knob CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Positive going edge Negative going edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically Xx J w Trigger slope can be positive or negative with trigger point occurring on the slope specified Figure 3 11 Slope and level define the trigger event Trigger Modes The trigger modes control the behavior of the instrument when not triggered Normal mode sets the instrument to acquire a waveform only when triggered Normal mode does not acquire data if triggering stops rather the last waveform records acquired remains frozen on the display if the channels containing them are displayed If no last waveform exists none is displayed See Figure 3 12 Normal trigger mode m Auto mode sets the instrument to acquire a waveform even if a trigger event does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after trigger rearm If the trigger circuit does not detect a trigger after this timeout about 100 ms it auto triggers forcing enough trigger events to acquire all active channels In the case of repetitive acquisitions in automatic trigger mode waveform samples are acquired but at different places in the data stream synchron
356. stable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 NRZ Crossing Level The mean signal level at the eye crossing If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before ta
357. structions on how to clean the exterior of the instrument and its touch screen 3 175 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 1 Overview 3 2 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual aE y E Acquiring Waveforms Before you can display measure or analyze a waveform you must acquire it from a signal This instrument comes equipped with the features you need for capturing your waveforms The following topics provide an overview of captur ing signals and digitizing them into waveform records m Signal Connection and Scaling How to connect signals to the instrument channels how to offset channels and position and scale the time bases for acquiring waveforms how to scale and position waveforms in the display m Setting Acquisition Controls How to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for acquiring your waveforms how to start and stop acquisition m Acquisition Control Background Information describing the data sampling and acquisition processes m FrameScan Acquisitions How to use FrameScan acquisition to help analyze pattern dependent failures in high bit rate communications signals Signal processing amp transformation system Acquisition system Output and User Interface storage and display Time base system Trigger system NOTE This section describes how the vertical and horizontal controls define the acquisition of live channel waveforms These controls also define how all waveforms are disp
358. t The ratio of the minimum value of the measured signal to its amplitude expressed as a percentage The waveform is scanned for the minimum value within the measurement region while the amplitude is measured in the Eye Aperture Low Min High Low Where Min is the signal minimum and High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time NRZ Overshoot 100 x If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 45 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name B 46 NRZ Optical Modulation Amplitude NRZ Peak to Peak Definition An approximation defined as the difference of the logical power 1 and 0 determined in a vertical slice through the eye crossing The levels are determined as the means
359. t an independent bit rate or Standard Mask Autoset if you set bit rate based on a communication standard Identification and analysis of pattern dependent failures FrameScan acquisition when used with mask testing and Stop After condition acquisition can automati cally determine the bit at which a pattern dependent failure occurred Improved noise resolution on low power communication signals The instrument can use Average acquisition mode on Eye diagrams when acquiring using FrameScan mode Averaging provides the noise resolution that the examination of many of today s low power communication signals can require FrameScan mode results in sequentially acquired data which can be averaged normal eye diagrams acquire data randomly and cannot be averaged Compare the noise of the waveforms that follow The right waveform is averaged the left is not CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms NATY YZS ME i i F bi SG Pa Pe ic sat hla PPARA TOERE ga Ree iat ee Ee H f H Togow J3 ooo o o i 2300p 882 1Moisseci 7000W J3 oo ooo s ioo 2g Ep2 1Mbitsisec What s Excluded The instrument must be in Average or Sample acquisition modes FrameScan excludes Envelope acquisition mode Keys to Using The key points that follow describe FrameScan mode operating behavior and provide background to help you to use this feature Determine Start Bit and Scan
360. t for anomalies in Pseudo Random Bit Streams See FrameScan Acquisitions on page 3 30 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 29 Acquiring Waveforms FrameScan Acquisitions 3 30 Why Use What s Special This instrument can modify its normal acquisition process to help you analyze pattern dependent failures in high bit rate communications signals FrameScan acquisitions allow detailed display and analysis of individual complete waveforms or of the bit sequences leading up to a failure This ability to identify the specific patterns that caused the failures makes using FrameScan mode superior to traditional methods Traditional methods include m creating an eye diagram which is a statistical representation of signal using clock triggered sampling oscilloscope m bit error testing to find the total number of errors in a frame These methods are time consuming to use and neither can examine in detail the pattern driving the failure FrameScan acquisition mode offers the following advantages Breakthrough time base stability Timing accuracy varies no more than 0 1 part per million from trigger event to data point providing the stability needed to examine signals of almost any length for pattern dependent failures Flexible set up support Set bit rates manually or set a bit rate based on a communication standard Then set the horizontal scale manually or invoke a custom autoset Bit Eye Pattern Autoset if you have se
361. t will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Non Return to Zero NRZ Measurements Area Table B 9 topic describes each NRZ measurement in the area category See Table B 7 on page B 37 for amplitude category measurements see Table B 8 on page B 50 for timing category measurements Table B 9 NRZ Measurements Area Name Definition NRZ Area The area under the curve for the NRZ waveform within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative NRZ Area raven dt over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 NRZ Cycle Area The area under the curve for the first NRZ bit tim
362. ta Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To determine RZ Average Optical Power dBm this measurement simply converts average optical power watts to decibels using a log10 function referenced to 1mW To determine average optical power in watts see the RZ Average Optical Power Watts measurement below For best average optical power measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box Compensate the optical channel which corrects for minor DC variances in the average power monitor as part of the compensation routine To access choose Compensation in the Utilities menu of the application DC Signal Current DC amps Conversion Gain amps watts Average Optical Power watts Where DC Signal Current is the O E converter photo detector current in DC amps Conversion Gain is the O E converter photo detector gain in amps watts Note Average optical power measurements return valid results only on channels that contain average power monitors In general all optical sampling module channels contain average power monitors To obtain accurate results the O E conver
363. te G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 31 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measurements Timing cont Name B 32 RZ Eye Width RZ Fall Time Definition The 30 guarded delta between the rising and falling edge crossings Eye Width Tcross2 3 Tcross2o Tcross1 3 Tcross1 o Where Tcross1 and Tcross2 are the mean of the histogram of the two crossings See RZ Crossings on page B 61 The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude See Mid reference level on page B 69 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 RZ Fall Time characterizes the negative slope of the RZ pulse by computing the time interval between the mean crossings of the high reference level and the low reference level RZ Fall Time TcrossL TcrossH Where m TcrossLRZFig RefLevels gt Second is the mean of the histogram
364. tents of 1 7 Page setup ink saver 3 134 Peripherals connection of 1 12 Persistence waveform database 3 159 Persistence infinite 3 67 variable 3 67 Phone number Tektronix xiii Pixel Glossary 7 PNG file format 3 136 Pop up menu Glossary 7 Position considerations for setting 3 6 horizontal 3 7 vertical 3 6 Power applying amp removing 1 13 1 15 Preview mode 3 55 usage limitations 3 55 Printing to a file 3 136 waveforms 3 132 Probe used on Trigger Direct input 3 44 Probe channel deskew Glossary 2 Probes Definition Glossary 7 Procedure back up user files 1 15 Check the Package Contents 1 7 diagnostics 1 18 first time power on 1 13 functional tests 1 21 hardware tests 1 38 incoming inspection 1 17 operating system reinstall 1 16 operating system tests 1 38 running QAPlus Win 1 39 To Autoset 3 11 To Clear References 3 127 To Compensate the Instrument and Modules 3 92 To Create a New Mask 3 152 To customize the database display 3 164 To Customize the Graticule amp Waveforms 3 69 To Define a Math Waveform 3 105 To Deskew Channels 3 96 To Display Waveform in a MagView 3 64 To Display Waveform in the Main View 3 62 To Edit a Mask 3 149 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Index To gated trigger 3 50 To Localize a Measurement 3 83 To Mask Test a Waveform 3 145 To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations 3 98 To Recall Your Setup 3 118 To Recall Yo
365. ter is calibrated at a fixed number of factory calibrated wavelengths to determine the conversion gain of the O E converter at each wavelength For best average optical power measurement results m Use a factory calibrated wavelength If using the USER wavelength setting ensure that it is properly compensated by performing the User Wavelength Gain compensation found by Clicking the Optical button in the Vertical Setup dialog box Compensate the optical channel which corrects for minor DC variances in the average power monitor as part of the compensation routine To access choose Compensation in the Utilities menu of the application CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 4 RZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name Definition RZ Extinction Ratio The ratio of the average power levels of the logic 1 level High to the logic 0 level Low of an optical RZ signal All level determinations are made within the RZ Eye Aperture RZ ExtRatio as Low Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 For best measurement results Always perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement
366. the maximum crossing time and the minimum crossing time for a histogram of the Tcross values Tcross is the horizontal coordinate of the first positive or negative crossing The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the pulse amplitude The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first specified edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 11 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 2 Pulse Measurements Timing cont Name Rise Time RMS Jitter Definition The time interval between the low reference level and the high reference level crossings on the positive slope of the pulse RZ Rise Time TcrossH HcrossL Where m TcrossH is the time of crossing of the high reference level m TcrossL is the time of crossing of the low reference level The low reference and high reference level
367. the sampling module you have chosen font seat Jest O Note For more details on controlling vertical setup push the Vertical MENU button to display the Vertical Setup dialog box and then click its HELP button 80E02 SAMPLING OO PROBE POWER SELECT ON OFF CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set the signal input cont Related control elements and resources Select the input 3 Push the channel button turns amber to assign ees VERTICAL signal channel the waveform buttons 1 8 to operate on channel waveforms Push a waveform button to select the signal channel it displays Li A waveform button lights when its channel is on a m When on but not selected its button is lighted green ES m When on and selected its button is lighted amber Hint To select one of the channels already ze displayed you can use a mouse and click its trace e or its reference indicator to select it Set the vertical 4 Use the Vertical Offset knob to adjust the selected VERTICAL acquisition waveform on screen Use the Vertical Scale and window Position knobs to adjust the display Positioned vertically Scaled vertically s POSITION OFFSET Ss SCALE Offset vertically CSA8000B amp TDS8000B
368. the software found on the CSA8000 amp TDS8000 OS Restore and Product Software CDs that accompany this product The instrument ships with the product software installed so only perform these procedures if reinstallation becomes necessary CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 15 Installation Description Software Release Notes Operating System Reinstallation System Diagnostics Windows Safe Mode There are two sets of CDs that ship with this instrument m OS Rebuild CD This 2 disk set contains the operating system for the instrument This CD set which can be used to rebuild the instrument hard drive includes the Windows operating system installation m Product Software CD The product software or UI application complements the hardware controls of the front panel allowing complete set up of all instrument features The Product Software CD includes software allowing you to reinstall the product software without having to rebuild the entire operating system Read the software release notes README TXT ASCII file if present on the Product Software CD before performing any installation procedures This file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other product documentation To view the README TXT file open the Notepad Windows accessory and open the file on the CD After installation you can also read the copy from a directory on the product C Programs Files TDSCSA8000 System If
369. ther process that record perform measurements waveform math mask tests and so on Refer to Keys to Using on page 3 22 for description of all three acquisition modes While sampling the input signal provides the data that makes up the waveform record for any given channel the instrument builds the waveform record through use of some common parameters common means they affect the waveforms in all channels Figure 3 9 shows how these common parameters define the waveform record as shown in the figure they define where in the data stream data is taken and how much data is taken Locate the following parameters in the figure m Sample Interval The precise time between sample points taken during acquisition m Record Length The number of samples required to fill a waveform record m Trigger Point The trigger point marks the time zero in a waveform record All waveform samples are located in time with respect to the trigger point m Horizontal Delay The time lapse from the trigger point to the first sample taken first point in the waveform record It is set indirectly by setting the horizontal position see Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 59 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Sample interval First sampled and digitized point Recurring trigger events from trigger signal Waveform record acquired over many acquisitions 1 sample per acquisit
370. ting of waveforms The entire math waveform is used as input to the automatic measurement system Basically you use the same techniques to work with math waveforms that work with channel waveforms The key points that follow describe operating considerations to take into account when using math waveforms Source Considerations In general be aware that changes to source waveforms that you include as math expression operands are reflected in the math wave form See Source Dependencies on page 3 104 Display Considerations Turn on and off the display of math waveforms like you do channel and reference waveforms Use the same front panel controls waveform selection buttons vertical position and scale knobs and application controls waveform control bar elements at the bottom of the display vertical setup menu Mouse operation for positioning waveforms on screen work also As is true for channel and reference waveforms turning a math waveform on or off in any time base display Main Mag1 or Mag2 also turns it on or off in all the time bases CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Creating Math Waveforms To Use Math Waveforms The procedure that follows demonstrates some common operations you can perform on math waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The Math waveform must be defined and displayed See the reference listed at right See To Define Math Wavefor
371. tio The inverse ratio of the average power level of the logic High to the Suppressed level measured between two consecutive RZ pulses with the result expressed in percentage The RZ pulse is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High is determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper half of the pulse The same region is sampled to record the data distribution in the lower half of the pulse data corresponding to the logical level 0 Similarly data is sampled in an equivalent sized region placed at one half bit interval offset from the Eye Aperture The mean of the histogram of the data distribution between the peaks adjusted by subtracting the zero level histogram yields the Suppressed level RZ Suppression Ratio 100 x Eege im High Where m High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels m Suppress is the mean of the histogram of the data within an Eye Aperture in the suppressed region The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 5 of the RZ pulse width See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 The region used for sampling the suppressed region is equal to the Eye Aperture and has no independent control See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measu
372. tion The inverse of the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points In other words it is the reciprocal of the Bit Time 1 NRZ Bit Rate Tcross2 E Tcross1 Where Tcross2 and Tcross1 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive eye crossings See NRZ Crossings on page B 64 If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 NRZ Bit Time is measured as the time interval between two consecutive eye crossing points NRZ Bit Time Tcross2 Tcross1 Where Tcross2 and Tcross1 are the mean of the histogram of the two consecutive eye crossings If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available The horizontal position of the eye crossing Data is sampled on a horizontal slice at the eye crossing and the mean of the horizontal histogram returns the crossing time If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement regio
373. tion performs a subset of the module compensation process It is designed to be fast so it can be performed frequently just before measurements are taken This compensation is not saved and are only valid for the selected bandwidth or filter path and the internal optical power meter You should perform the procedure To Compensate the Instrument and Modules on page 3 92 to compensate all vertical bandwidth and filter selections Use the following procedure to perform either compensation this procedure applies only to optical modules To perform optical compensations Control elements and resources The instrument must be installed with at least one optical sampling modules to be dark level calibrated in place The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See the sampling module User Manuals for sampling module installation Use the Vertical buttons to select the channel to be compensated c From the application menu bar click Setup and then click Vertical See right Setup Utilities HelplT riggere al Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Histogram Cursors wfm Database TDR CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview Run the dark level compensa tion Run the user compensation To perform optical compensations cont In Vert Setup dialog box click the Dark Level button under Compensation See right Follow the
374. to lt 200 mVpk pk 80A02 FOS ESD Protection Module A module that protects the sensitive input stage of instruments such as the sampling bridge of Tektronix electrical TDR sampling modules from damage due to electro overstress EOS and electro static discharge ESD from the device under test DUT CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual T E Check the Package Contents Verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument You should verify that you have the main instrument all the standard accessories for the main instrument Standard accessories are listed in Table 1 3 on page 1 41 the correct power cords for your geographical area the OS Rebuild CDs and Product Software CD that include an installation copy of the software installed on the instrument and all files needed to rebuild your instrument operating system if necessary Store the CDs in a safe location where you can easily retrieve them for maintenance purposes NOTE Keep the certificate of authenticity that accompanies the product software CD the 8000 Series Demo Applications Software CD that includes an installa tion copy of the software This CD which is a separate CD from the Oscilloscope software includes the TDR Impedance Measuring application which implements the TDR calibration procedures specified by the IPC TM 650 test methodology and the Fast NRZ application which allows you to improve throughput for when eye pattern mask testi
375. to click to check Maasim KEE the On box so that the waveform displays Mi on Tip If the waveform you select already exists its math expression appears in the dialog box You can still use the waveform by clicking the Clear button which discards its previous math expression Or repeat step 3 to select another waveform Build a math 4 Use the dialog box at right to define a math expression PEE HEI expression See Table 3 8 on page 3 103 for expression examples some guidelines for creating your expression follow p Math Waveform M1 To On Math Expression C1 Functions m Sources C1 C8 R1 R8 and Meas1 ra m vines Meas8 should be set up before you use them Expt ee references and automated measurement scalars defined leet ee p E Elements that appear grayed out cannot be Backspace _ Faer Fiseie 1000r BE selected because they would result in an illegal cee Faeroe Cares entry For example the sources are grayed out ppl Caneel Heb because a source was just entered You must enter an operator before entering another source Use the backspace button to remove the last entry use the clear key to remove the entire expression and start over Use parentheses to group terms in the expression to control execution order for example 5 C1 C2 Apply a filter 5 Use the filter controls in the dialog box to apply a filter
376. tomatic Measurements on page 3 74 describes how you can set up the instrument to automatically measure and display a variety of waveform parameters See Figure 3 18 m Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 85 describes using cursors to make amplitude and time measurements on waveforms See Figure 3 18 m Optimizing Measurement Accuracy on page 3 92 tells you how to run compensation routines and deskew channels to optimize the accuracy of your measurements NOTE You can also make graticule measurements counting graticule divisions and multiplying them by the vertical or horizontal scales set for the waveform you are measuring Graticule Cursors Readouts E SOmvidiv Measurement Measurement C1 Peri 682 5ns readouts i Freq 1465H ti 1 013us t2 1 5 us At 346 7ns 1jAt 2 884MHz2 Mean 93 94m Median 100m StdDev 11 57m Pk Pk 51 25m utio 84 8 tla 92 2 30 97 9 Peak 446376 Hits 161126 Waveforms 32666 Cursor readouts Figure 3 18 Graticule cursor and automatic measurements CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 73 Measuring Waveforms Taking Automatic Measurements Why Use What s Measured What s Special 3 74 This powerful and flexible tool provides automatic extraction of various parameters from the waveforms that this instrument acquires Automated measurements quickly give you immediate continuously updating measurement results for a rich selection of waveform parameters
377. trations to see examples of waveform database data using different display options CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 165 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases Overview To customize the database display cont Related control elements amp resources Notice the difference in intensities of the same data between these two illustrations In the top illustration this portion of data is lighter in intensity signalling it is least occurring In the illustration to the right with Invert Color Intensity turned on this data appears much darker allowing you to see the data more clearly End of Procedure 3 166 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual EE See Accessing Online Help What s Available Why Use Keys to Using This manual represents only part of the user assistance available to you the online help system integrated as part of the instrument user interface provides quick to access support for operating the instrument This section describes the help system and how to access it The instrument provides the following help resources online m Tool tips m What s This Help m Overview Help m Topical index m Getting Started Guide m Measurements Center and Measurements Reference m Setup procedures m Programmers Guide NOTE A PDF version of the Programmer Reference Guide is available on the Tektronix Web site see Contacting in the Preface on page xiii Go to the link for User Man
378. trument is powered down Use the following procedure to optimize the instrument for the current tempera ture to enhance measurement results To perform a compensation Related control elements and resources See Install the Sampling Modules on page 1 10 Display the From the application menu bar select Utilities and then Utilities Waveforms Compensation select Compensation See right Define Autoset dialog box a Autaset In the Compensation dialog box the main instrument Unde aios Y mainframe and sampling modules are listed Run Stop Default Setup The temperature change from the last compensation is also listed See below 3 92 Calibration Riaannsties CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview Compensation Curent Date Time Mainframe Model 1 80C 01 CR SNEN4 80E04 80E03 B0E03 i E mr E o E a ee a oS CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual To perform a compensation cont 11 May 00 13 25 Serial TOSicsaeo0n BO00000 Upper Sampling Modules Serial P 2048 Lower Sampling Modules Serial overriden by upper modules overriden by upper modules B69 B69 B22 B22 Date Time 11 May 00 13 25 Date Time 11 May 00 13 25 Date Time 11 May 00 13 25 11 May 00 13 25 11 May 00 13 25 11 May 00 13 25 Status Pass Status Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass ATEMP 0 2 C 0 0 C 0 0 C 0 09C 0 0 C 0
379. tup dialog box topic in the online help system CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 1 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Pulse Measurements Amplitude Table B 1 describes on page B 2 describes each pulse measurement in the amplitude category See Table B 2 on page B 8 for timing category measure ments see Table B 3 on page B 14 for area category measurements Table B 1 Pulse Measurements Amplitude Name AC RMS Amplitude Average Optical Power dBm Definition The root mean square voltage minus the DC component of the waveform that is sampled within the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 The vertical difference between the High and Low of the signal The method used to determine the High and the Low values can be controlled independently by the tracking method See Tracking Methods on page B 66 Also see High Low Tracking Method on page 3 77 Amplitude High Low Where High and Low are measured values If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 For best results with this measurement optimize the vertical
380. uals and select the document name from the download selection list Use online help as your primary always on hand user information source for this instrument Most of the information you need to operate this instrument and use it effectively is found in the online help where you can quickly access it and display on your instrument screen The key points that describe operating considerations for using the online and other documentation for this instrument follow m Use online help when you want to minimize interruption to your work flow Often a tool tip or What s This Help each of which is a pop up of brief information in a bubble displayed on screen gives you enough support to CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 167 Accessing Online Help continue your setup Overview help is there when you need to probe more deeply into feature operation m Use the manuals to read instructions on putting the instrument into service procedures on reinstalling its product software listings of specifications and overviews of features and their operation See Documentation Map on page 2 2 for an description of the documents for this instrument and their purposes m Use the online programmers guide either displayed on the instrument screen or on any windows equipped PC for support on operating the instrument from the GPIB How to Use Online Help Use the procedure steps that follow to access contextual help and to learn how to se
381. uires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions of the event This instrument uses a type of equivalent time sampling called sequential equivalent time sampling See Sequential equivalent time sampling Extinction Ratio The ratio of two optical power levels of a digital signal generated by an optical source P4 is the optical power level generated when the light source is high and P3 is the power level generated when the light source is low P la P Gated measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using measurement gates General purpose knob The large front panel knob on the upper right corner of the front panel You can use it to change the value of the control or element that currently has focus It can adjust the cursors GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You can use it to visually measure wavef
382. uments UI Data ManCl wim the File Path field F Click to access the file system see right and Agress 1O Valka ybonta r navigate to a new directory Access to file system Rename the file and or change the directory by typing a new name and path into the File Path field If you ve selected multiple waveforms the File Path field will change to Dir Prefix You can edit the path and the prefix used for the filenames as just described All files will save into the same directory The File Path field will change to Dir Prefix 3 122 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Data Input and Output Overview To save a waveform cont Control elements amp resources Add a comment 7 For saves to files or to references you can enter a ae SEs optional useful comment about the each waveform you save Recorded 2 3 00 Write each comment such that it explains the purpose of Need tals a the saved waveform when its waveform file is later re accessed see right Tip If you save multiple waveforms the instrument saves your comment with all the resulting files so make such a comment pertain to all the waveforms Save your 8 Click the Save button to save the waveform file or waveform reference To cancel without saving click Cancel button Cancel Help For more 9 For more help on saving waveforms press the Help information button in the dialog box to access the contextual online help See page 3 167 t
383. und and the amplitude value between the bars Horizontal delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data The time is set indirectly by the Horizontal reference setting and the horizontal position settings See Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference on page 3 59 Horizontal reference point The point about which waveforms are expanded or contracted horizontally CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 when horizontal scale adjustments are made The horizontal reference point remains anchored as the rest of the waveform grows or shrinks around it Icon See Channel Icon Initialize Setting the instrument to a completely known default condition by pressing executing a Default Setup Internal clock A trigger source that is synchronized to the internal clock with a selectable repetition rate It is most often used with TDR to synchronize the generation of TDR step pulses with subsequent acquisition Interpolation The way the instrument calculates additional values to display when the acquired record length is less than 500 points The instrument has three interpolation options linear sin x x or none Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time
384. up for the time base tests 0 000 1 28 Figure 1 12 Channel button location 00 cee eeeeees 1 29 Figure 1 13 Main time base verification eee0e 1 30 Figure 1 14 Mag time base verification 0 cee eeee 1 31 Figure 1 15 Channel button location 0 cece eens 1 32 Figure 1 16 Hookup for the gated trigger tests 6 1 33 Figure 1 17 Signal triggered cece eee rere eens 1 34 Figure 1 18 Signal not triggered signal frozen 1 35 Figure 1 19 Signal not triggered no signal 0005 1 36 Figure 1 20 Signal triggered 0 cece cece cece eees 1 37 Figure 3 1 Acquisition and display controls 006 3 4 Figure 3 2 Setting vertical scale and position of input channels 3 15 Figure 3 3 Varying offset positions vertical acquisition window on waveform amplitude ccc ceeeecevees 3 17 Figure 3 4 Horizontal acquisition window definition 3 18 Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate for all channels 0 cece cece cece cere eee neees 3 20 Figure 3 6 Aliasing 0 0 ccc ce cece cece cece naoin eeh 3 23 Figure 3 7 Channel configuration 0 cece eee ee eeee 3 27 Figure 3 8 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing 3 28 Figure 3 9 The waveform record and its defining parameters 3 29 Figure 3 10 How FrameScan acqui
385. ur Waveform 3 124 To Reset the Instrument 3 13 To Save Your Setup 3 115 To Save Your Waveform 3 121 To Set Acquisition Modes 3 24 To Set Display Styles 3 68 To Set the Cursor Sources 3 90 To set up a waveform database 3 162 To Acquire in FrameScan mode 3 33 To Catch a Bit Error 3 36 To Set Up the Signal Input 3 8 To Start amp Stop Acquisition 3 26 To Take a Histogram 3 156 To Take Automatic Measurements 3 80 3 89 To trigger 3 48 To Use an Exported Waveform 3 129 To Use Math Waveforms 3 109 To use online help 3 168 Procedures in the online help 3 172 Product accessories list 1 41 description 1 1 functional model 2 4 installation 1 9 options list 1 41 software 1 3 Product support contact information xiii Programmer guide 2 2 Propagation delay deskew 3 96 Pulse automatic measurements Area related B 14 Pulse measurements amplitude B 2 Pulse measurements area B 14 Pulse measurements timing B 8 Q QAPIlus Win application 1 38 Quantizing Glossary 8 R Range vertical input 3 14 Readout display 2 7 Readouts 2 7 Readouts bar 2 7 Real time sampling Glossary 8 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Recalling a setup 3 113 Recalling a waveform 3 120 Record acquisition shared by all channels 3 20 length defined 3 28 Record length Glossary 8 Reference levels methods for setting 3 79 Reference memory Glossary 8 Reference waveforms Glossary 8 how to cl
386. urement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 RZ Pk Pk Jitter The delta between the minimum and maximum of time crossings at the reference level with the mean of the histogram being Tcross Pk PK Jitter Tcrosspp The mid reference level is adjustable and defaults to 50 of the RZ maximum pulse amplitude The jitter measurement can be performed on the positive or negative slope The slope can be selected to be the first positive the first negative or the first crossing positive or negative in the region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 By default the algorithm searches forward from the Start Gate for the first specified edge but the Direction of traversal can be reversed so that the search will be backward from the Stop Gate This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 33 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 5 RZ Measure
387. use or touchscreen to drag to resize and reposition the masks directly on the screen CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 141 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases 3 142 What s Excluded Keys to Using Mask Specific Autoset You can set Autoset to either Auto or Manual in the Mask Setup dialog box When set to Auto the instrument automatically performs a standard mask specific autoset whenever you select a standard mask GPIB editing You cannot edit masks through the programmable interface GPIB You can however still create and or delete entire masks through this interface Concurrent Mask Tests Only one mask standard or user defined set is active at any time If you have a mask selected enabled and then select a new mask the new mask replaces the previous mask You cannot test to multiple standards simultaneously The key points that describe operating considerations for using and editing masks follow Mask Standards and Masks A mask standard contains one or more masks that when applied against the waveforms for which they are intended test the waveform for violations of an industry standard The supported standards are listed in Table 3 9 Masks are numbered polygons that define an area within a mask standard or within a user mask in which to count waveform samples as hits Table 3 9 Standard masks SONET SDH Ethernet Other OC 1 STM 0 51 84 Mb s Gigabit Ethernet OC 3 STM 1 155 52 Mb s 10
388. veforms Triggering Process When a trigger event occurs the instrument acquires a sample in the process of building a waveform record The trigger event establishes the time zero point in the waveform record and all samples are measured with respect to that event The trigger event starts waveform acquisition A trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal that the trigger circuit monitors passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope When a trigger event occurs the instrument acquires one sample of the input signal When the next trigger event occurs the instrument acquires the next sample This process continues until the entire record is filled with acquired samples Without a trigger the instrument does not acquire any samples See Figure 3 9 on page 3 29 This behavior differs from that of real time acquisition systems which can acquire a complete waveform record from a single trigger event Triggering is Global The instrument uses the trigger event to acquire across all active channels This same trigger is also common across all time bases currently active one or more of Main Magi and Mag2 Edge Trigger Type This instrument supports edge triggering only in which edge triggers gate a series of acquisitions The slope control determines whether the instrument recognizes the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal See Figure 3 11 You can set the trigger
389. w To Access Op erating System 3 174 Help To use the online help cont 14 Click the minimize button to reduce the User Interface Application to an icon on the operating system toolbar See upper right Click the Start button to pop up the Start menu and then select Help from the menu See lower right The online help for the Windows operating system displays When your done with the online help you can dismiss it To restore the user interface application to the screen Click its icon in the tool bar Tip To switch between online help and the application you can hold down the ALT key while you press Tab repeatedly to alternate between bringing help to the front and the application End of Procedure Control elements amp resources Click to minimize to the toolbar Tektronix x EN Programs k Favorites cy Documents k Eh Settings k A Era Windows 3 Help CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual a a ee Cleaning the Instrument A Exterior Cleaning A Periodically you may need to clean the exterior of your instrument To do so follow the instructions in this section WARNING Before performing any procedure that follows power down the instrument and disconnect it from line voltage CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Clean the exterior surface
390. waveform points See To Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 69 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual B 47 Appendix B Automatic Measurements Reference Table B 7 NRZ Measurements Amplitude cont Name B 48 NRZ Q Factor NRZ RMS Definition NRZ Q Factor is a figure of merit of an eye diagram reporting the ratio between the amplitude of the NRZ eye to the total RMS noise on the High and Low levels The NRZ eye is sampled within the Eye Aperture where the High and Low levels are determined as the mean of the histogram of the data distribution in the upper and lower half of the eye respectively The noise levels are characterized by ohigh and olow the standard deviations from the mean for the High and Low levels High Low NRZ Q Factor high olow Where High and Low are the logical 1 and 0 levels and ohigh and olow are the standard deviations See RZ Eye Aperture Parameters on B 62 The Eye Aperture is adjustable and defaults to 20 of the NRZ bit time If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Da
391. waveform you select CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To control the Main view cont Related control elements and resources Set the horizon tal display parameters Adjust the 7 Horizontal Reference Quick adjust 9 the time base Zoom Push the View Main button to make sure the Main time ACQUISITION base view is selected Use the Horizontal knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen and to set sample L HORIZONTAL TRIGGER resolution Scaled Horizontally Positioned Horizontally lt ra D RESOLUTION SCALE p The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion on page 3 19 Push the Set to 50 button if required to stabilize display To adjust the point around which the waveforms Horizontal reference expand and contract click the Horizontal reference and drag it left or right on screen Move the Horizontal reference along the horizontal axis until it aligns to the point on the waveform you want to be stationary on screen Release the Horizontal reference and then adjust the Horizontal Scale knob To quickly rescale a portion of a channel waveform so Ee Eut wen Setup ites Hep espe eet Bere hla it expands to fill the 10 divisions on screen Click on Fe Tran aeania ees Sja A ac Auno Aca
392. what it was when the setup was saved CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 3 155 Using Masks Histograms and Waveform Databases To Take a Histogram Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the default settings for histograms Overview To take a histogram Related control elements amp resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have at least one waveform displayed to access the Hist Setup dialog box See page 3 62 for waveform display instructions if needed Access the 2 Open the Hist Setup dialog box by selecting Histogram Setup Utilities Help histogram in the Setup menu Vertical Horizontal Acquire Trigger Measurement Mask Display Cursors Wim Database TDR Set display and 3 Use the Source pulldown list to select a waveform Source reset histogram source for the histogram Enable Hist source and type EmA Paden ccr cy Check Enable Histogram to start histogram counting Vertical ie intial display the histogram on screen and turn on the Histogram readout T Use Wim Database Ua Click the Vertical or Horizontal histogram option button of you choice You can only display one type of histogram at a time Check if you want the data taken on an accumulation of the source waveforms a waveform database instead of on the currently acquired waveform Press Clear to reset the histogram count and to clear the data in the source waveform Histograms tr
393. x fans with speed regulated by internal temperature sensors A 2 inch 51 mm clearance must be maintained on the left side and right sides of the instrument and a 0 75 19 mm clearance must be maintained on the bottom of the instrument for forced air flow It should never be operated on a bench with the feet removed nor have any object placed nearby where it may be drawn against the air vents No clearance is required on the front back and top Characteristics 211 2 mm wide x 1 58 4 mm high 264 mm 10 4 inch diagonal liquid crystal active matrix color display LCD 640 horizontal by 480 vertical pixels Pixels are 0 33 mm horizontal and 0 33 mm vertical A 7 Appendix A Specifications A 8 Table A 7 Ports Specifications Video outputs Parallel port IEEE 1284 Serial port PS 2 Keyboard and Mouse Interface LAN interface External audio con nectors USB interface GPIB interface Gated Trigger Input Logic Polarity Option GT equipped instruments only Gated Trigger Input Maximum Non de struct Input Levels Option GT equipped instruments only Characteristics Two 15 pin D subminiature connectors on the rear panel Useable to connect external monitors that provide a duplicate of the primary display and or a second monitor on which to view other applications Support at least the basic requirements of the PC99 specification 25 pin D subminature connector on the rear
394. y rate can be defined by the user if the optical module supports a continuous rate clock recovery Refer to Sampling Modules Supported on page 1 4 to see those modules that support continuous rate clock recovery See Table 3 1 on page 3 43 for more information Note When using any of the above sources disconnect any signal connected to the other source trigger and clock sources See External 10MHz Reference Input when using the Internal clock Select source 3 slope and level Click the Trig Source menu and select the trigger source to match your trigger signal in the pull down menu upper right corner of display Source Menu vi Slope button Trig Internal Clock A N mea C1 100mVvfc J al D Click the Slope button to toggle to the trigger slope you f extemal Prescany AA want positive or negative Internal Clack Clock Recover 5 Adjust the trigger level using the Set Level to 50 button or the Level list box as show at right or using those on the front panel shown in step 7 Level Controls 3 48 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual Triggering Overview Verify 6 triggering Other trigger 7 parameters For more 8 information When the instrument is triggered the word Triggered is displayed in the toolbar on screen You can use also the trigger lights to verify triggering status as follows If you need to change the trigger mode or other settings push the Trigg
395. ycle Area Definition The area under the curve for the RZ waveform within the measurement region Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative RZ Area revert dt over the measurement region If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 See To Localize a Measurement on page 3 83 This measurement requires the use of a waveform database When this measurement is turned on it will automatically set the measurement system to use a waveform database if available See Use a Waveform Database on page B 70 For best results with this measurement m Perform a Dark Level compensation before taking this measurement if the source of the measured waveform is an optical channel See To Perform Dark Level and User Wavelength Gain Compensations on page 3 98 Optimize the vertical resolution before taking this measurement See How to Optimize the Vertical Resolution on page B 70 The area under the curve for the first RZ bit period Area measured above ground is positive area measured below ground is negative RZ Area revere dt Where the measurement region is from Start Gate G1 to Stop Gate G2 if measurement gates are enabled or the first acquired RZ cycle If enabled measurement gates constrain the measurement region to the area between the Start Gate G1 and Stop Gate G2 This measurement requires the use of a wave
396. ys The key points that follow describe operating considerations for setting up automatic measurements to obtain the best measurement results Measurement Selection The instrument takes automatic measurements of the following categories Amplitude Timing and Area Check Appendix B Automatic Measurements Supported for a listing of the measurements that you can choose from in each signal type category Number of Measurements The instrument can take and update up to eight measurements at one time You can apply measurements to any combination of sources described below You can take all eight measurements on C1 for example or one measurement each on C1 C8 Measurement Sources All channel reference and math waveforms can serve as sources for automatic measurements You can also measure any of the four waveform databases that the instrument supports You can specify a waveform as source in the Meas Setup dialog box even if the waveform is not displayed Some measurements such as Gain Delay and Phase require two sources For example Gain would be used to measure an input from one measurement source such as C1 with respect to an output in another source such as C2 Databases as Sources Behavior Consider the following operating behaviors regarding measurements and databases m When enabling a measurement it will always measure the waveform database if the measurement source you choose is currently displayed as a CSA80
397. ystem In the UI application toolbar select Internal Clock from the Trig list box as shown below i Tektronix J TialEtema Dies Ao A External Direct Sse HExtemalPrescaler A ia Internal Clock k aveta Clock Recover c3 100 0 CSA8000B amp TDS8000B User Manual 1 25 Incoming Inspection 3 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you want to test The button lights amber and the channel displays See Figure 1 9 VERTICAL Channel gt lt buttons 2 a of d gt O 7 D m Figure 1 9 Channel button location 4 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true m A baseline trace displays at about center screen see Figure 1 10 on page 1 27 and the vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting as follows m 80C01 80C02 80C04 80C09 and 80C11 1 mW 80C03 100 uW 80C05 3 mW 80C06 6 mW 80C07 and 80C07B 100 uW 80C08 80CO8B and 80C08C 200 uW 80C10 3 mW m Turning the front panel Vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the signal up and down the screen Return the baseline trace to center screen before continuing m Turning the front panel Vertical OFFSET knob counterclockwise offsets the baseline towards the bottom of the screen turning the knob clockwise offsets the baseline towards the top of the screen and returning the knob to 0 000 offset returns the baseline to c

Tektronix CSA8000B Stereo System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents